Vacon 100 Application Manual DPD00927F UK PDF

vacon 100
ac drives
application manual
PREFACE VACON · 3
PREFACE
Document ID: DPD00927F
Date: 30.1.2014
Software version: FW0072V012
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is copyright of Vacon Plc. All Rights Reserved.
In this manual, you can read about the functions of the Vacon® AC drive and how to use the
drive. The manual has the same structure than the menu of the drive (chapters 1 and 4-8).
Chapter 1, Quick Startup Guide
• How to start the work with the control panel.

Chapter 2, Wizards
• Making a selection of the application configuration.

• Setting up an application quickly.
• The different applications with examples.
Chapter 3, User Interfaces
• The display types and how to use the control panel.

• The PC tool Vacon Live.
• The functions of the fieldbus.
Chapter 4, Monitoring menu
• Data on the monitoring values.

Chapter 5, Parameter menu
• A list of all the parameters of the drive.

Chapter 6, Diagnostics menu
Chapter 7, I/O and Hardware menu
Chapter 8, User settings, favourites and user level menus
Chapter 9, Parameter descriptions
• How to use the parameters.

• Digital and analogue input programming.
• Application-specific functions.
24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected]

VACON · 4 PREFACE
Chapter 10, Fault tracing
• The faults and their causes.

• Resetting the faults.
Chapter 11, Appendix
• Data on the different default values of the applications.

This manual includes a large quantity of parameter tables. These instructions tell you how to
read the tables.
A B C D E F G H
Index Parameter Min Max Unit Default ID Description
A. The location of the parameter in the F. The value that was set in the factory.
menu, that is, the parameter number. G. The ID number of the parameter.
B. The name of the parameter. H. A short description of the values of the
C. The minimum value of the parameter. parameter and/or its function.
D. The maximum value of the parameter. I. When the symbol shows, you can find
E. The unit of the value of the parameter. more data about the parameter in
The unit shows if it is available. Chapter Parameter descriptions.
NOTE! You can download the English and French product manuals with applicable safety, warning and caution
information from www.vacon.com/downloads.
REMARQUE Vous pouvez télécharger les versions anglaise et française des manuels produit contenant
l'ensemble des informations de sécurité, avertissements et mises en garde applicables sur le site
www.vacon.com/downloads.
TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

PREFACE VACON · 5
FUNCTIONS OF THE VACON® AC DRIVE
• Wizards for startup, PID control, multipump and fire mode to make the commissioning
easy.
• The FUNCT button for an easy change between the local and the remote control place.
The remote control place can be I/O or fieldbus. You can make a selection of the remote
control place with a parameter.
• 8 preset frequencies.
• Motor pontentiometer functions.
• A joystick control.
• A jogging function.
• 2 programmable ramp times, 2 supervisions and 3 ranges of prohibited frequencies.
• A forced stop.
• A control page to operate and monitor of the most important values quickly.
• A fieldbus data mapping.
• An automatic reset.
• Different pre-heat modes to prevent condensation problems.
• A maximum output frequency of 320 Hz.
• A Real time clock and timer functions (an optional battery is necessary). It is possible to
program 3 time channels to get different functions on the drive.
• An external PID controller is available. You can use it, for example, to control a valve with
the I/O of the AC drive.
• A sleep mode function that automatically enables and disables the operation of the drive
to save energy.
• A 2-zone PID controller with 2 different feedback signals: minimum and maximum
control.
• 2 setpoint sources for the PID control. You can make the selection with a digital input.
• A function for PID setpoint boost.
• A feedforward function to make the response to the process changes better.
• A process value supervision.
• A multipump control.
• A maintenance counter.
• Pump control functions: priming pump control, jockey pump control, pump impeller
auto-cleaning, pump input pressure supervision and frost protection function.

VACON · 6
TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

TABLE OF CONTENTS VACON · 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface
About this manual 3
Functions of the Vacon® AC drive 5
1 Quick Startup Guide 11
1.1 Control panel and keypad 11
1.2 The displays 11
1.3 First start-up 12
1.4 Description of the applications 14
1.4.1 Standard application 14
1.4.2 Local/Remote application 21
1.4.3 Multi-step speed application 28
1.4.4 PID control application 35
1.4.5 Multi-purpose application 45
1.4.6 Motor potentiometer application 55
2 Wizards 63
2.1 Standard application wizard 63
2.2 Local/Remote application wizard 64
2.3 Multi-step speed application wizard 65
2.4 PID control application wizard 66
2.5 Multi-purpose application wizard 68
2.6 Motor potentiometer application wizard 69
2.7 Multipump wizard 70
2.8 Fire mode wizard 72
3 User interfaces 74
3.1 Navigation on the keypad 74
3.2 Using the graphical display 76
3.2.1 Editing the values 76
3.2.2 Resetting a fault 79
3.2.3 The FUNCT button 79
3.2.4 Copying the parameters 83
3.2.5 Comparing the parameters 85
3.2.6 Help texts 86
3.2.7 Using the Favourites menu 87
3.3 Using the text display 87
3.3.1 Editing the values 88
3.3.2 Resetting a fault 89
3.3.3 The FUNCT button 89
3.4 Menu structure 93
3.4.1 Quick setup 94
3.4.2 Monitor 94
3.5 Vacon Live 96

VACON · 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 Monitoring menu 97
4.1 Monitor group 97
4.1.1 Multimonitor 97
4.1.2 Trend curve 98
4.1.3 Basic 101
4.1.4 I/O 103
4.1.5 Temperature inputs 103
4.1.6 Extras and advanced 105
4.1.7 Timer functions monitoring 107
4.1.8 PID controller monitoring 108
4.1.9 External PID controller monitoring 109
4.1.10 Multipump monitoring 109
4.1.11 Maintenance counters 110
4.1.12 Fieldbus data monitoring 111
5 Parameters menu 113
5.1 Group 3.1: Motor settings 113
5.2 Group 3.2: Start/stop setup 121
5.3 Group 3.3: References 124
5.4 Group 3.4: Ramps and brakes setup 134
5.5 Group 3.5: I/O configuration 137
5.6 Group 3.6: Fieldbus data mapping 151
5.7 Group 3.7: Prohibit frequencies 153
5.8 Group 3.8: Supervisions 154
5.9 Group 3.9: Protections 155
5.10 Group 3.10: Automatic reset 166
5.11 Group 3.11: Application settings 168
5.12 Group 3.12: Timer functions 169
5.13 Group 3.13: PID controller 172
5.14 Group 3.14: External PID controller 188
5.15 Group 3.15: Multipump 193
5.16 Group 3.16: Maintenance counters 195
5.17 Group 3.17: Fire mode 196
5.18 Group 3.18: Motor preheat parameters 198
5.19 Group 3.20: Mechanical brake 200
5.20 Group 3.21: Pump control 201
6 Diagnostics menu 204
6.1 Active faults 204
6.2 Reset faults 204
6.3 Fault history 204
6.4 Total counters 204
6.5 Trip counters 206
6.6 Software info 207
7 I/O and hardware menu 208
7.1 Basic I/O 208
7.2 Option board slots 210
7.3 Real time clock 211
TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

TABLE OF CONTENTS VACON · 9
7.4 Power unit settings 211

7.5 Keypad 213
7.6 Fieldbus 213
8 User settings, favourites and user level menus 218
8.1 User settings 218
8.1.1 Parameter backup 219
8.2 Favourites 219
8.2.1 Adding an item to the Favourites 220
8.2.2 Removing an item from the Favourites 220
8.3 User levels 221
8.3.1 Changing the access code of the user levels 222
9 Parameter descriptions 224
9.1 Motor settings 224
9.1.1 I/f start function 232
9.1.2 Torque stabilator function 233
9.2 Start/Stop setup 234
9.3 References 241
9.3.1 Frequency reference 241
9.3.2 Torque reference 241
9.3.3 Preset frequencies 243
9.3.4 Motor potentiometer parameters 246
9.4 Joystick parameters 248
9.5 Jogging parameters 249
9.6 Ramps and brakes setup 251
9.7 I/O configuration 252
9.7.1 Programming of digital and analogue inputs 252
9.7.2 Default functions of programmable inputs 263
9.7.3 Digital inputs 263
9.7.4 Analogue inputs 264
9.7.5 Digital outputs 269
9.7.6 Analogue outputs 271
9.8 Prohibit frequencies 274
9.9 Supervisions 275
9.9.1 Motor thermal protections 276
9.9.2 Motor stall protection 279
9.9.3 Underload protection 280
9.10 Automatic reset 285
9.11 Timer functions 286
9.12 PID controller 290
9.12.1 Feedforward 291
9.12.2 Sleep function 291
9.12.3 Feedback supervision 293
9.12.4 Pressure loss compensation 294
9.12.5 Soft fill 296
9.12.6 Input pressure supervision 297
9.12.7 Frost protection 298

VACON · 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.13 Multipump function 299

9.14 Maintenance counters 305
9.15 Fire mode 305
9.16 Motor preheat function 307
9.17 Mechanical brake 308
9.18 Pump control 311
9.18.1 Auto-cleaning 311
9.18.2 Jockey pump 312
9.18.3 Priming pump 313
9.19 Total and trip counters 314
9.19.1 Operating time counter 314
9.19.2 Operating time trip counter 315
9.19.3 Run time counter 315
9.19.4 Power on time counter 316
9.19.5 Energy counter 316
9.19.6 Energy trip counter 317
10 Fault tracing 319
10.1 A fault comes into view 319
10.1.1 Resetting with the Reset button 319
10.1.2 Resetting with a parameter in the graphical display 319
10.1.3 Resetting with a parameter in the text display 320
10.2 Fault history 321
10.2.1 Examining the Fault history in the graphical display 321
10.2.2 Examining the Fault history in the text display 322
10.3 Fault codes 324
11 Appendix 1 337
11.1 The default values of parameters in the different applications 337
TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

QUICK STARTUP GUIDE VACON · 11
1 QUICK STARTUP GUIDE

1.1 CONTROL PANEL AND KEYPAD
The control panel is the interface between the AC drive and the user. With the control panel,
you can control the speed of a motor and monitor the status of the AC drive. You can also set
the parameters of the AC drive.
A B C
H D
G F E
Fig. 1: The buttons of the keypad

A. The BACK/RESET button. Use it to move D. The arrow button RIGHT.
back in the menu, exit the Edit mode, E. The START button.
reset a fault. F. The arrow button DOWN. Use it to scroll
B. The arrow button UP. Use it to scroll the the menu down and to decrease a value.
menu up and to increase a value. G. The STOP button.
C. The FUNCT button. Use it to change the H. The arrow button LEFT. Use it to move
rotation direction of the motor, access the cursor left.
the control page, and change the control I. The OK button. Go into an active level or
place. See more in Table 38 Frequency item, accept a selection.
reference parameters.
1.2 THE DISPLAYS

There are 2 display types: the graphical display and the text display. The control panel always
has the same keypad and buttons.
The display shows this data.

• The status of the motor and the drive.
• Faults in the motor and in the drive.
• Your location in the menu structure.
24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected] 1

VACON · 12 QUICK STARTUP GUIDE
A B C D E
STOP READY I/O

F
Main Menu
G
ID: M1
Quick Setup
( 17 )
Monitor H
( 5 )
Parameters
( 12 )
Fig. 2: The graphical display
A. The first status field: STOP/RUN F. The location field: the ID number of the
B. The rotation direction of the motor parameter and the current location in
C. The second status field: READY/NOT the menu
READY/FAULT G. An activated group or item
D. The alarm field: ALARM/- H. The number of items in the group in
E. The control place field: PC/IO/KEYPAD/ question
FIELDBUS
A B
F E
Fig. 3: The text display. If the text is too long to show, the text scrolls automatically on the display.
A. The indicators of status D. The current location in the menu
B. The indicators of alarm and fault E. The indicators of the control place
C. The name of the group or item of the F. The indicators of the rotation direction
current location
1.3 FIRST START-UP

The Start-up wizard tells you to give necessary data for the drive to control your procedure.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Language selection (P6.1) The selection is different in all the language

1
packages
Daylight saving* (P5.5.5)

Russia
2 US
EU
OFF
3 Time* (P5.5.2) hh:mm:ss
4 Year* (P5.5.4) yyyy
5 Date* (P5.5.3) dd.mm.
* If a battery is installed, you see these questions.
Run Startup wizard?

6 Yes
No
To set the parameter values manually, make the selection No and push the OK button.
Make a selection of an application (P1.2 Application,

ID212) Standard
Local/Remote
7 Multi-step speed
PID control
Multi-purpose
Motor potentiometer
Set a value for P3.1.2.2 Motor Type (so that it agrees

8 with the nameplate) PM motor
Induction motor
Set a value for P3.1.1.1 Motor Nominal Voltage (so Range: Varies
9
that it agrees with the nameplate)
Set a value for P3.1.1.2 Motor Nominal Frequency Range: 8.00...320.00 Hz

10
(so that it agrees with the nameplate)
Set a value for P3.1.1.3 Motor Nominal Speed (so Range: 24...19200
11
that it agrees with the nameplate)
12 Set a value for P3.1.1.4 Motor Nominal Current Range: Varies
13 Set a value for P3.1.1.5 Motor Cos Phi Range: 0.30-1.00
If you set Motor Type to Induction Motor, you see the next question. If your selection is PM
Motor, the value of parameter P3.1.1.5 Motor Cos Phi is set to 1.00 and the wizard goes
directly to question 14.

Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Minimum Frequency Range: 0.00...P3.3.1.2 Hz

14
Reference
Set a value for P3.3.1.2 Maximum Frequency Range: P3.3.1.1...320.00 Hz

15
Reference
16 Set a value for P3.4.1.2 Acceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s
17 Set a value for P3.4.1.3 Deceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s
Run the Application wizard?

18 Yes
No
To continue to the application wizard, set the selection to Yes and push the OK button. See
the description of the different application wizards in Chapter 2 Wizards.
After these selections, the Start-up wizard is completed. To start the Start-up wizard again,
you have 2 alternatives. Go to the parameter P6.5.1 Restore Factory Defaults or to the
parameter B1.1.2 Start-up Wizard. Then set the value to Activate.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE APPLICATIONS

Use the parameter P1.2 (Application) to make a selection of an application for the drive.
Immediately when the parameter P1.2 changes, a group of parameters get their preset
values.
1.4.1 STANDARD APPLICATION

You can use the Standard application in speed-controlled processes where no special
functions are necessary, for example pumps, fans, or conveyors.
It is possible to control the drive from the keypad, Fieldbus or I/O terminal.
When you control the drive with the I/O terminal, the frequency reference signal is connected
to AI1 (0…10V) or AI2 (4…20mA). The connection depends the type of the signal. There are
also 3 preset frequency references available. You can activate the preset frequency
references with DI4 and DI5. The start/stop signals of the drive are connected to DI1 (start
forward) and DI2 (start reverse).
It is possible to configure all the drive outputs freely in all the applications. There are 1
analogue output (Output Frequency) and 3 relay outputs (Run, Fault, Ready) available on the
basic I/O board.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Standard I/O board

Terminal Signal Description
1 +10 Vref Reference output
Reference
potentiom- 2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 + Frequency reference
eter
1...10kΩ 3 AI1- Analogue input 1 - (default 0...10V)
4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + Frequency reference

5 AI2- Analogue input 2 - (Default 4...20mA)
6 24Vout 24V auxiliary voltage

7 GND I/O ground
8 DI1 Digital input 1 Start forward
9 DI2 Digital input 2 Start reverse
10 DI3 Digital input 3 External fault
11 CM Common for DI1-DI6 *)

13 GND I/O ground
DI4 DI5 Freq. ref.
14 DI4 Digital input 4 Open Open Analog input 1
Closed Open Preset Freq. 1
Open Closed Preset Freq. 2
15 DI5 Digital input 5 Closed Closed Preset Freq. 3
16 DI6 Digital input 6 Fault reset

18 AO1+ Analogue output 1 + Output frequency

mA (default: 0...20mA)
19 AO1- Analogue output 1 -
24V auxiliary
30 +24Vin input voltage
A RS485 Serial bus, negative Modbus RTU
B RS485 Serial bus, positive N2, BACnet
21 RO1/1 NC Relay output 1

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
FAULT 25 RO2/2 CM FAULT
26 RO2/3 NO
32 RO3/2 CM Relay output 3
READY **)
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 4: The default control connections of the Standard application
* = You can isolate the digital inputs from the ground with a DIP switch.

Digital inputs
Floating
Connected to GND (Default!)
Fig. 5: The DIP switch
Table 2: M1.1 Wizards
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate
1.1.1 Startup wizard 0 1 0 1170 The selection Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
Table 1 The Start-up
wizard.
The selection Activate

starts the Multipump
1.1.3 Multi-pump Wizard 0 1 0 1671
wizard (see Chapter
2.7 Multipump wizard).

starts the Fire mode
1.1.4 Fire mode Wizard 0 1 0 1672
wizard (see Chapter
2.8 Fire mode wizard).
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 3: M1 Quick Setup
0 = Standard
1.2 1 = Local/Remote
2 = Multi-Step Speed
Application 0 5 0 212
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
1.3 0.00 P1.4 Hz 0.0 101 frequency reference
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Maximum Frequency 50.0 /
1.4 P1.3 320.0 Hz 102 frequency reference
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.
Gives the quantity of

time that is necessary
for the output
1.5 Acceleration Time 1 0.1 300.0 s 5.0 103 frequency to increase
from zero frequency to
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
1.6 Deceleration Time 1 0.1 300.0 s 5.0 104 frequency to decrease
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

1.7 Motor Current Limit IH*0.1 IS A Varies 107 current from the AC
drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
1 = Permanent Magnet
Motor
Find this value Un on

the rating plate of the
motor.
Motor Nominal
1.9 Varies Varies V Varies 110 NOTE!
Voltage
Find out if the motor
connection is Delta or
Star.

Find this value fn on

Motor Nominal
1.10 8.0 320.0 Hz 50 / 60 111 the rating plate of the
Frequency
motor.
Find this value nn on

Motor Nominal
1.11 24 19200 Rpm Varies 112 the rating plate of the
Speed
motor.
Find this value In on

Motor Nominal
1.12 IH * 0.1 IH * 2 A Varies 113 the rating plate of the
Current
motor.
Find this value on the

Motor Cos Phi
1.13 0.30 1.00 Varies 120 rating plate of the
(Power Factor)
motor.
The drive searches for

the minimum motor
current to save energy
and to lower the motor
noise. Use this function
1.14 Energy Optimization 0 1 0 666 with, for example, fan
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The identification run

calculates or measures
the motor parameters
that are necessary for
a good control of the
motor and speed.
1.15 Identification 0 2 0 631

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

identification run, you
must set the motor
nameplate parameters.
1.16 Start Function 0 1 0 505 0 = Ramping

1 = Flying Start
1.17 Stop Function 0 1 0 506 0 = Coasting

1 = Ramping
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1.18 Automatic Reset 0 1 0 731 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
Response to External 2 = Fault (Stop
1.19 0 3 2 701
Fault according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Alarm+preset fault
frequency (P3.9.1.13)
Response to AI Low 3 = Alarm + previous
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
The selection of the

remote control place
(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control
1 = Fieldbus control


frequency reference
source when the
control place is I/O A.
0 = Preset Frequency 0
1 = Keypad Reference
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
8 = Joystick Reference
1.22 Reference A 0 9 5 117
9 = Jogging Reference
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10
The application that

you set with parameter
1.2 gives the default
value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
1.23 0 9 1 121 source when the
Reference Selection
control place is keypad.
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is
fieldbus. See P1.22.
1.25 AI1 Signal Range 0 1 0 379 0= 0..10V / 0..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1
Table 4: M1.31 Standard
Make the selection of a

1.31.1 Preset Frequency 1 P1.3 P1.4 Hz 10.0 105 preset frequency with
the digital input DI4.


preset frequency with
1.31.3 Preset Frequency 3 P1.3 P1.4 Hz 20.0 126
the digital input DI4
and DI5.
1.4.2 LOCAL/REMOTE APPLICATION

Use the Local/Remote application when, for example, it is necessary to switch between 2
different control places.
To change between the Local and the Remote control place, use DI6. When Remote control is
active, you can give the start/stop commands from Fieldbus or from I/O terminal (DI1 and
DI2). When Local control is active, you can give the start/stop commands from the keypad,
Fieldbus or I/O terminal (DI4 and DI5).
For each control place, you can make a selection of the frequency reference from the
keypad, Fieldbus or I/O terminal (AI1 or AI2).
basic I/O board.

Standard I/O board

1 +10 Vref Reference output
Reference
potentiom- 2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 + LOCAL:
eter
Frequency reference
1...10kΩ 3 AI1- Analogue input 1 - (default: 0...10V)
Remote reference 4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + REMOTE:
(4...20mA) Frequency reference
5 AI2- Analogue input 2 - (default: 4...20mA)
Remote
control 7 GND I/O ground
(+24V)
8 DI1 Digital input 1 REMOTE: Start forward
9 DI2 Digital input 2 REMOTE: Start reverse

Remote
control ground 11 CM Common for DI1-DI6 *)

13 GND I/O ground
14 DI4 Digital input 4 LOCAL: Start forward
15 DI5 Digital input 5 LOCAL: Start reverse
16 DI6 Digital input 6 LOCAL/REMOTE
selection

mA (default: 0...20mA)
19 AO1-/GND Analogue output 1 -
30 +24Vin 24V auxiliary

input voltage
B RS485 Serial bus, positive BACnet, N2

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
26 RO2/3 NO
READY
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 6: The default control connections of the Local/Remote application
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Digital inputs
Floating
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
wizard.

wizard (see Chapter

wizard (see Chapter

0 = Standard
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.

for the output
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
Motor

motor.
Motor Nominal
Voltage
Star.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


Motor Nominal
Frequency
motor.

Motor Nominal
Speed
motor.

Motor Nominal
Current
motor.

Motor Cos Phi
(Power Factor)
motor.

the minimum motor
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

motor and speed.

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor

1 = Flying Start

1 = Ramping


1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.19 0 3 2 701
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


frequency reference
source when the
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
1.22 Reference A 0 9 3 117
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
Reference Selection
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1
Table 7: M1.32 Local/Remote
I/O Control See P1.22

1.32.1 Reference B 1 20 4 131
Selection
DigIN TRUE = Force control

1.32.2 I/O B Control Force 425
SlotA.6 place to I/O B
TRUE = Used frequency

I/O B Reference DigIN reference is specified
1.32.3 343
Force SlotA.6 by I/O Reference B
parameter (P1.32.1)
DigIN Start signal 1 when

1.32.4 Control Signal 1 B 423
SlotA.4 control place is I/O B
DigIN Start signal 1 when

1.32.5 Control Signal 2 B 424
SlotA.5 control place is I/O B
Keypad Control DigIN Force Control to

1.32.6 410
Force SlotA.1 Keypad
Fieldbus Control DigIN Force Control to

1.32.7 411
Force Slot0.1 Fieldbus
External Fault DigIN

1.32.8 405 FALSE = OK
(Close) SlotA.3
TRUE = External fault
DigIN Resets all active faults

1.32.9 Fault Reset (Close) 414
Slot0.1 when TRUE
1.4.3 MULTI-STEP SPEED APPLICATION

You can use the Multi-step speed application with processes where more than 1 fixed
frequency reference is necessary (for example test benches).
It is possible to use 1 + 7 frequency references: 1 basic reference (AI1 or AI2) and 7 preset
references.
Make a selection of the preset frequency references with digital signals DI4, DI5 and DI6. If
none of these inputs are active, the frequency reference is removed from the analogue input
(AI1 or AI2). Give the start/stop commands from the I/O terminal (DI1 and DI2).
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

basic I/O board.
Standard I/O board

1 +10Vref Reference output
Reference
potentiometer 2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 + Frequency
1...10 kΩ reference
(default 0...10V)
3 AI1- Analogue input 1 -
4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + Frequency

reference
(default 4...20mA)

7 GND I/O ground
13 GND I/O ground
DI4DI5 DI6 Freq. ref.
14 DI4 Digital input 4 000 Analog input
1 00 Preset Freq. 1
0 1 0 Preset Freq. 2
15 DI5 Digital input 5 1 1 0 Preset Freq. 3
0 10 Preset Freq. 4
1 0 1 Preset Freq. 5
16 DI6 Digital input 6 0
1
1
1
1
1
Preset Freq. 6
Preset Freq. 7

Analogue output 1 + Output
18 AO1+
frequency
mA (default:
19 AO1- 0...20mA)
Analogue output 1 -
24V auxiliary
30 +24Vin
input voltage
A RS485 Serial bus, negative Modbus RTU,

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
26 RO2/3 NO
READY
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 8: The default control connections of the Multi-step speed application

Digital inputs
Floating
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
wizard.

wizard (see Chapter

wizard (see Chapter
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

0 = Standard
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.

for the output
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
Motor

motor.
Motor Nominal
Voltage
Star.


Motor Nominal
Frequency
motor.

Motor Nominal
Speed
motor.

Motor Nominal
Current
motor.

Motor Cos Phi
(Power Factor)
motor.

the minimum motor
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

motor and speed.

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor

1 = Flying Start

1 = Ramping
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.19 0 3 2 701
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control


frequency reference
source when the
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
1.22 Reference A 0 9 5 117
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
Reference Selection
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1
Table 10: M1.33 Multi-step speed
0 = Binary Coded
1 = Number of inputs.
Preset Frequency Preset frequency is
1.33.8 0 1 0 128
Mode selected according to
how many of preset
speed digital inputs
are active.
External Fault DigIN

1.33.9 405 FALSE = OK
(Close) SlotA.3
DigIN Resets all active faults

1.33.10 Fault Reset (Close) 414
Slot0.1 when TRUE
1.4.4 PID CONTROL APPLICATION

You can use the PID control application with processes where you control the process
variable (for example pressure) through control of the speed of the motor.
In this application, the internal PID controller of the drive is configured for 1 setpoint and 1
feedback signal.
It is possible to use 2 control places. Make the selection of the control place A or B with DI6.
When control place A is active, the start/stop commands are given by DI1, and the PID
controller gives the frequency reference. When control place B is active, start/stop
commands are given by DI4, and AI1 gives the frequency reference.

basic I/O board.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Standard I/O board

Reference Terminal Signal Description
potentiom-
eter 1 +10 Vref Reference output
1...10kΩ Place A: PID setpoint
2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 + (reference)
2-wire Place B: Frequency
transmitter reference
Actual 3 AI1- Analogue input 1 - (default: 0...10V)
value -
4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + PID feedback
(actual value)
I=
5 AI2- Analogue input 2 - (default: 4...20mA)
(0)4...20mA +
7 GND I/O ground
Place A: Start forward
8 DI1 Digital input 1 (PID controller)


13 GND I/O ground
Place B: Start forward
14 DI4 Digital input 4 (Freq. reference P3.3.1.6)
15 DI5 Digital input 5 Preset frequency 1

16 DI6 Digital input 6 Control place A/B selection

mA 19 AO1-/GND Analogue output 1 - (default: 0...20mA)
input voltage
B RS485 Serial bus, positive N2, BACnet

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
26 RO2/3 NO
READY
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 10: The default control connections of the PID control application

Digital inputs
Floating
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
wizard.

wizard (see Chapter

wizard (see Chapter
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

0 = Standard
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.

for the output
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
Motor

motor.
Motor Nominal
Voltage
Star.


Motor Nominal
Frequency
motor.

Motor Nominal
Speed
motor.

Motor Nominal
Current
motor.

Motor Cos Phi
(Power Factor)
motor.

the minimum motor
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

motor and speed.

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor

1 = Flying Start

1 = Ramping
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.19 0 3 2 701
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control


frequency reference
source when the
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
1.22 Reference A 0 9 6 117
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
Reference Selection
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1

Table 13: M1.34 PID control
If the value of the

parameter is set to
100% a change of 10%
1.34.1 PID Gain 0.00 100.00 % 100.00 18 in the error value
causes the controller
output to change by
10%.
If this parameter is set

to 1,00s a change of
10% in the error value
1.34.2 PID Integration Time 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 119
output to change by
10.00%/s.
f this parameter is set

to 1,00s a change of
1.34.3 PID Derivation Time 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 1132
during 1.00 s causes
the controller output to
change by 10.00%.
Feedback 1 Source See P3.13.3.3

1.34.4 0 30 2 334
Selection
Setpoint 1 Source See P3.13.2.6

1.34.5 0 32 1 332
Selection
1.34.6 Keypad Setpoint 1 Varies Varies Varies 0 167
Drive goes to sleep

mode when the output
frequency stays below
Sleep Frequency
1.34.7 0.0 320.0 Hz 0.0 1016 this limit for a time
Limit 1
greater than that
defined by parameter
Sleep delay.
The minimum amount

of time the frequency
1.34.8 Sleep Delay 1 0 3000 s 0 1017 has to remain below
the Sleep level before
the drive is stopped.
Defines the level for

the PID feedback value
1.34.9 Wake-up Level 1 Varies Varies Varies Varies 1018 wake-up supervision.
Uses selected process
units.
Preset Frequency
1.34.10 Preset Frequency 1 P1.3 P1.4 Hz 10.0 105 selected by digital
input DI5.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1.4.5 MULTI-PURPOSE APPLICATION

You can use the Multi-purpose application for different processes (for example conveyors)
where a wide range of motor control functions is necessary.
It is possible to control the drive from the keypad, Fieldbus or I/O terminal. When you use I/O
terminal control, the start/stop commands are given through DI1 and DI2, and the frequency
reference from AI1 or AI2.
There are 2 acceleration/deceleration ramps available. The selection between Ramp1 and
Ramp2 is made by DI6.
basic I/O board.

Standard I/O board

Reference
potentiometer 1 +10 Vref Reference output
1...10kΩ 2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 + Frequency reference
2-wire 3 AI1- Analogue input 1 - (default 0...10V)
transducer
- 4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + Frequency reference
5 AI2- Analogue input 2 - (Default 4...20mA)
(0)4...20mA +
7 GND I/O ground
13 GND I/O ground
16 DI6 Digital input 6 Ramp 1/Ramp 2 selection

mA
19 AO1-/GND Analogue output 1 - (0...20mA)
input voltage

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
26 RO2/3 NO
READY
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 12: The default control connections of the Multi-purpose application
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Digital inputs
Floating
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
wizard.

wizard (see Chapter

wizard (see Chapter

0 = Standard
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.

for the output
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
Motor

motor.
Motor Nominal
Voltage
Star.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


Motor Nominal
Frequency
motor.

Motor Nominal
Speed
motor.

Motor Nominal
Current
motor.

Motor Cos Phi
(Power Factor)
motor.

the minimum motor
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

motor and speed.

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor

1 = Flying Start

1 = Ramping


1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.19 0 3 2 701
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


frequency reference
source when the
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
1.22 Reference A 0 9 5 117
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
Reference Selection
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 16: M1.35 Multi-purpose
0 = U/f Freq Control

open loop
1.35.1 Control Mode 0 2 0 600 1 = Speed control open
loop
2 = Torque Control
open loop
1.35.2 Auto Torque Boost 0 1 0 109 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
Defines the time that is

necessary for the
output frequency to
1.35.3 Acceleration Time 2 0.1 300.0 s 10.0 502
increase from zero
frequency to maximum
frequency.
Defines the time that is

necessary for the
output frequency to
1.35.4 Deceleration Time 2 0.1 300.0 s 10.0 503
decrease from
maximum frequency to
zero frequency.
Preset Frequency
1.35.5 Preset Frequency 1 P1.3 P1.4 Hz 5.0 105 selected by digital
input DI4.
Type of U/f curve

between zero
frequency and the field
weakening point.
1.35.6 U/f Ratio Select 0 2 0 108
0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
The field weakening

point is the output
Field Weakening frequency at which the
1.35.7 8.00 P1.4 Hz Varies 602
Point Frequency output voltage reaches
the field weakening
point voltage
Voltage at field
Voltage at Field weakening point in %
1.35.8 10.00 200.00 % 100.00 603
Weakening Point of motor nominal
voltage

Provided that the

programmable U/f
curve has been
U/f Midpoint
1.35.9 0.0 P1.35.7 Hz Varies 604 selected (par. P1.35.6),
Frequency
this parameter defines
the middle point
frequency of the curve.
Provided that the

programmable U/f
curve has been
1.35.10 U/f Midpoint Voltage 0.0 100.00 % 100.0 605 selected (par. P1.35.6),
this parameter defines
the middle point
voltage of the curve.
This parameter defines

the zero frequency
Zero Frequency voltage of the U/f
1.35.11 0.00 40.00 % Varies 606
Voltage curve. The default
value varies according
to unit size.
Defines the DC current

Start Magnetizing
1.35.12 0.00 Varies A Varies 517 fed into motor at start.
Current
Disabled if set to 0.
This parameter defines

the time for how long
Start Magnetizing
1.35.13 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 516 DC current is fed to
Time
motor before
acceleration starts.
Defines the current

injected into the motor
during DC braking.
1.35.14 DC Brake Current Varies Varies A Varies 507
0 = Disabled
Determines if braking
is ON or OFF and the
DC Braking time at
1.35.15 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 508 braking time of the DC-
stop
brake when the motor
is stopping.
Frequency to start The output frequency

1.35.16 DC braking at ramp 0.10 50.00 % 0.00 515 at which the DC-
stop braking is applied.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The drooping function

enables speed drop as
a function of load.
1.35.17 Load Drooping 0.00 50.00 % 0.00 620 Drooping will be
defined in percent of
nominal speed at
nominal load.
Load drooping is used

in order to achieve a
dynamic speed
drooping because of
changing load. This
1.35.18 Load Drooping Time 0.00 2.00 s 0.00 656
parameter defines the
time during which the
speed is restored to
the level it was before
the load increase.
0 = Normal; Load
drooping factor is
constant through the
whole frequency range
1.35.19 Load Drooping Mode 0 1 0 1534
1 = Linear removal;
Load drooping is
removed linearly from
nominal frequency to
zero frequency
1.4.6 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER APPLICATION

Use the Motor potentiometer application for the processes where the frequency reference of
the motor is controlled (that is, increased and decreased) through digital inputs.
In this application, the I/O terminal is set to the default control place. the start/stop
commands are given with DI1 and DI2. The frequency reference of the motor is increased
with DI5 and decreased with DI6.
basic I/O board.

Standard I/O board

1 +10Vref Reference output
2 AI1+ Analogue input 1 +

Not used
4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 +

Not used

7 GND I/O ground
13 GND I/O ground
15 DI5 Digital input 5 Frequency reference UP
16 DI6 Digital input 6 Frequency reference DOWN

AO1+ Analogue output 1 + Output
18
frequency
mA 0...20mA)
19 AO1-/GND Analogue output 1 -
24V auxiliary
30 +24Vin
input voltage

RUN
22 RO1/2 CM RUN
23 RO1/3 NO
26 RO2/3 NO
READY
33 RO3/3 NO
Fig. 14: The default control connections of the Motor potentiometer application
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Digital inputs
Floating
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

starts the Start-up
wizard (see Chapter
wizard.

wizard (see Chapter

wizard (see Chapter

0 = Standard
3 = PID Control
4 = Multi-Purpose
5 = Motor
Potentiometer
The minimum
Minimum Frequency
Reference
that is acceptable.
The maximum
Reference 60.0
that is acceptable.

for the output
the maximum
frequency.

for the output
from the maximum
frequency to zero
frequency.
The maximum motor

drive.
0 = Induction Motor
1.8 Motor Type 0 1 0 650
Motor

motor.
Motor Nominal
Voltage
Star.
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


Motor Nominal
Frequency
motor.

Motor Nominal
Speed
motor.

Motor Nominal
Current
motor.

Motor Cos Phi
(Power Factor)
motor.

the minimum motor
and pump processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

motor and speed.

0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor

1 = Flying Start

1 = Ramping


1 = Enabled
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.19 0 3 2 701
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
1.20 0 5 0 700
Fault frequency
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

(start/stop).
Remote Control
1.21 0 1 0 172
Place
0 = I/O control
1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


frequency reference
source when the
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID Reference
7 = Motor
Potentiometer
I/O Control
1.22 Reference A 0 9 7 117
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.

frequency reference
Keypad Control
Reference Selection
See P1.22.

frequency reference
Fieldbus Control
Reference Selection
control place is

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA

1= 2..10V / 4..20mA
1.27 RO1 Function 0 51 2 1101 See P3.5.3.2.1

1.28 RO2 Function 0 51 3 1104 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.29 RO3 Function 0 51 1 1107 See P3.5.3.2.1
1.30 AO1 Function 0 31 2 10050 See P3.5.4.1.1
Table 19: M1.36 Motor Potentiometer
The rate of change in

the motor
Motor Potentiometer potentiometer
1.36.1 0.1 500.0 Hs/s 10.0 331
Ramp Time reference when it is
increased or decreased
with DI5 or DI6.
The condition in which

the frequency
reference of the motor
potentiometer is reset
to zero.
Motor Potentiometer
1.31.2 0 2 1 367
Reset
0 = No reset
1 = Reset if stopped
2 = Reset if powered
down

1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 63
2 WIZARDS
2.1 STANDARD APPLICATION WIZARD
The application wizard helps you to set the basic parameters that are related to the
application.
To start the Standard application wizard, set the value Standard to parameter P1.2
Application (ID 212) in the keypad.
NOTE!
If you start the application wizard from the Start-up wizard, the wizard goes directly
to question 11.

1 with the nameplate of the motor) PM motor
Induction motor
2
that it agrees with the nameplate of the motor)

3
(so that it agrees with the nameplate of the motor)
Set a value for P3.1.1.3 Motor Nominal Speed (so Range: 24...19200 rpm
4
Set a value for P3.1.1.4 Motor Nominal Current (so Range: Varies
5
Motor, the value of parameter P3.1.1.5 Motor Cos Phi is set to 1.00, and the wizard goes
Set a value for P3.3.1.5 Motor Cos Phi (so that it Range: 0.3...1.00
6
agrees with the nameplate of the motor)
Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Minimum Frequency Range: 0.00...P3.3.1.2 Hz

7
Reference
Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Maximum Frequency Range: P3.3.1.1...320.00 Hz

8
Reference
9 Set a value for P3.4.1.2 Acceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s
10 Set a value for P3.4.1.2 Deceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s
Make a selection of a control place (where you give

the start and stop commands, and the frequency I/O terminal
11 reference of the drive) Fieldbus
Keypad

VACON · 64 WIZARDS
The Standard application wizard is completed.
2.2 LOCAL/REMOTE APPLICATION WIZARD

The application wizard helps you to set the application related basic parameters.
To start the Local/Remote application wizard, set the value Local/Remote to parameter P1.2
NOTE!
to question 11.

Induction motor
2

3
Set a value for P3.1.1.3 Motor Nominal Speed (so Range: 24...19200 rpm
4
5
Set a value for P3.1.1.5 Motor Cos Phi (so that it Range: 0.30…1.00
6
Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Minimum Frequency Range: 0.00…P3.3.1.2 Hz

7
Reference
Set a value for P3.3.1.2 Maximum Frequency Range: P3.3.1.1…320.00 Hz

8
Reference
9 Set a value for P3.4.1.2 Acceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1…300.0 s
10 Set a value for P3.4.1.3 Deceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1…300.0 s
Make a selection of the Remote control place

(where you give the start and stop commands, and I/O terminal
11
the frequency reference of the drive when Remote Fieldbus
control is active)
If you set I/O Terminal as the value for Remote Control Place, you see the next question. If you
set Fieldbus, the wizard goes directly to question 14.
2 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 65
P1.26 Analogue Input 2 Signal Range

12 0=0…10V / 0…20mA
1=2…10V / 4…20mA
Set Local Control Place (where the drive start/stop

commands and the frequency reference is given Fieldbus
13 when Local control is active) Keypad
I/O (B) terminal
If you set I/O (B) Terminal as the value for Local Control Place, you see the next question. With
other selections, the wizard goes directly to question 16.
P1.25 Analogue Input 1 Signal Range

14 0=0…10V / 0…20mA
1=2…10V / 4…20mA
The Local/Remote application wizard is completed.
2.3 MULTI-STEP SPEED APPLICATION WIZARD

application.
To start the Multi-step speed application wizard, set the value Multi-step speed to parameter
P1.2 Application (ID 212) in the keypad.
NOTE!
If you start the application wizard from the Start-up wizard, the wizard shows only
the I/O configuration.

Induction motor
2
Set a value for P3.1.1.2 Motor Nominal Frequency Range: 8.00…320.00 Hz

3
Set a value for P3.1.1.3 Motor Nominal Speed (so Range: 24…19200 rpm
4
5

VACON · 66 WIZARDS
6

7
Reference

8
Reference
The Multi-step speed application wizard is completed.
2.4 PID CONTROL APPLICATION WIZARD

application.
To start the PID control application wizard, set the value PID control to parameter P1.2
NOTE!
If you start the application wizard from the startup wizard, the wizard goes directly
to the question 11.

Induction motor
2

3
4
5
2 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 67
6
Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Minimum Frequency Range: 0.00 Hz…P3.3.1.2

7
Reference

8
Reference
Make a selection of a control place (where you give

the start/stop commands) I/O Terminal
11
Fieldbus
Keypad
12 Set a value for P3.13.1.4 Process Unit Selection More than 1 selection
If your selection is other than %, you see the next questions. If your selection is %, the wizard
goes directly to question 17.
Set a value for P3.13.1.5 Process Unit Min The range depends on the selection in
13
question 12.
Set a value for P3.13.1.6 Process Unit Max The range depends on the selection in
14
question 12.
15 Set a value for P3.13.1.7 Process Unit Decimals Range: 0…4
Set a value for P3.13.3.3 Feedback 1 Source See the table Feedback settings in Chapter
16
Selection 5.13 Group 3.13: PID controller
If you make a selection of an analogue input signal, you see the question 18. With other
selections, the wizard goes to question 19.
Set the signal range of the analogue input

17 0 = 0…10V / 0…20mA
1 = 2…10V / 4…20mA
Set a value for P3.13.1.8 Error Inversion

18 0 = Normal
1 = Inverted
Set a value for P3.13.2.6 Setpoint Source Selection See table Setpoints in Chapter 5.13 Group
19
3.13: PID controller
If you set Keypad Setpoint 1 or Keypad Setpoint 2 for the value, the wizard goes directly to
question 22.

VACON · 68 WIZARDS

20 0 = 0…10V / 0…20mA
1 = 2…10V / 4…20mA
Set a value for P3.13.2.1 (Keypad Setpoint 1) and Depends on the range set in the question 20.
21
P3.13.2.2 (Keypad Setpoint 2)
Using the sleep function

22 0 = No
1 = Yes
If you give the value Yes for the question 22, you see the next 3 questions. If you give the value
No, the wizard is completed.
23 Set a value for P3.34.7 Sleep Frequency Limit Range: 0.00…320.00 Hz
24 Set a value for P3.34.8 Sleep Delay 1 Range: 0…3000 s
25 Set a value for P3.34.9 Wake-up Level The range depends on the set process unit
The PID Control application wizard is completed.
2.5 MULTI-PURPOSE APPLICATION WIZARD

application.
To start the Multi-purpose application wizard, set the value Multi-purpose to parameter P1.2
NOTE!
to question 11.

Induction motor
2

3
4
5
2 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 69
6

7
Reference

8
Reference
Select Control Place (where you give the start and

stop commands, and the frequency reference of the I/O Terminal
11 drive) Fieldbus
Keypad
The Multi-purpose application wizard is completed.
2.6 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER APPLICATION WIZARD

The application wizard helps you to set the application related basic parameters.
To start the Motor potentiometer application wizard, set the value Motor potentiometer to
parameter P1.2 Application (ID 212) in the keypad.
NOTE!
to question 11.

Induction motor
2

3
4
5

VACON · 70 WIZARDS
6

7
Reference

8
Reference
Set a value for P1.36.1 Motor Potentiometer Ramp Range: 0.1…500.0 Hz/s
11
Time
Set a value for P1.36.2 Motor Potentiometer Reset

0 = No Reset
12
1 = Stop State
2 = Power Down
The Motor Potentiometer application wizard is completed.
2.7 MULTIPUMP WIZARD

To start the Multipump wizard, make the selection Activate for parameter B1.1.3 in the Quick
setup menu. The default settings tell you to use the PID controller in the one feedback / one
setpoint mode. The default control place is I/O A, and the default process unit is %.
1 Set a value for P3.13.1.4 Process Unit Selection More than 1 selection.
If your selection is other than %, you see the next questions. If your selection is %, the wizard
goes directly to question 5.
2 Set a value for P3.13.1.5 Process Unit Min Varies
3 Set a value for P3.13.1.6 Process Unit Max Varies
4 Set a value for P3.13.1.7 Process Unit Decimals 0...4
Set a value for P3.13.3.3 Feedback 1 Source See the table Feedback settings in Chapter
5
Selection 5.13 Group 3.13: PID controller.
2 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 71

0 = 0…10V / 0…20mA
6 1 = 2…10V / 4…20mA
See table Analogue inputs in Chapter 5.5
Group 3.5: I/O configuration.
Set a value for P3.13.1.8 Error Inversion

7 0 = Normal
1 = Inverted
Set a value for P3.13.2.6 Setpoint Source 1 Selection See table Setpoints in Chapter 5.13 Group
8
3.13: PID controller.
If you set Keypad Setpoint 1 or Keypad Setpoint 2 for the value, you see the question 10.

0 = 0…10V / 0…20mA
9 1 = 2…10V / 4…20mA
See table Analogue inputs in Chapter 5.5
Group 3.5: I/O configuration.
Set a value for P3.13.2.1 (Keypad setpoint 1) and Varies

10
P3.13.2.2 (Keypad setpoint 2)
Using the sleep function

11 No
Yes
If you give the value Yes for the question 11, you see the next 3 questions.
12 Set a value for P3.13.5.1 Sleep Frequency Limit 1 0.00...320.00 Hz
13 Set a value for P3.13.5.2 Sleep Delay 1 0...3000 s
14 Set a value for P3.13.5.6 Wake-up Level 1 The range depends on the set process unit.
15 Set a value for P3.15.1 Number of Motors 1...6
Set a value for P3.15.2 Interlock Function

16 0 = Not used
1 = Enabled
Set a value for P3.15.4 Autochange

17 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
If you enable the Autochange function, you see the next 3 questions. If you do not use the
Autochange function, the wizard goes directly to question 21.

VACON · 72 WIZARDS
Set a value for P3.15.3 Include FC

18 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
19 Set a value for P3.15.5 Autochange Interval 0.0...3000.0 h
20 Set a value for P3.15.6 Autochange: Frequency Limit 0.00...50.00 Hz
21 Set a value for P3.15.8 Bandwidth 0...100%
22 Set a value for P3.15.9 Bandwidth Delay 0...3600 s
After this, the display will show the digital input and relay output configuration that the
application does automatically. Write these values down. This function is not available in the
text display.
2.8 FIRE MODE WIZARD

To start the Fire Mode Wizard, make the selection Activate for parameter B1.1.4 in the Quick
setup menu.
CAUTION!
Before you continue, read about the password and warranty in Chapter 9.15 Fire
mode.
Set a value for parameter P3.17.2 Fire Mode More than 1 selection
1
Frequency Source
If you set a value other than Fire mode frequency, the wizard goes directly to question 3.
2 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

WIZARDS VACON · 73
Set a value for parameter P3.17.3 Fire Mode 8.00 Hz...P3.3.1.2 (MaxFreqRef)
2
Frequency
Activate the signal when the contact opens or when

3 it closes 0 = Open contact
1 = Closed contact
Set a value for parameters P3.17.4 Fire Mode Make a selection of a digital input to activate
4 Activation on OPEN / P3.17.5 Fire Mode Activation Fire mode. See also Chapter 9.7.1
on CLOSE Programming of digital and analogue inputs.
Set a value for parameter P3.17.6 Fire Mode Make a selection of a digital input to activate
Reverse the reverse direction in Fire mode.
5
DigIn Slot0.1 = FORWARD
DigIn Slot0.2 = REVERSE
Set a value for P3.17.1 Fire Mode Password Set a password to enable the Fire mode
function.
6
1234 = Enable test mode
1002 = Enable Fire mode

VACON · 74 USER INTERFACES
3 USER INTERFACES
3.1 NAVIGATION ON THE KEYPAD
The data of the AC drive is in menus and submenus. To move between the menus, use the
arrow buttons Up and Down in the keypad. To go into a group or an item, push the OK button.
To go back to the level where you were before, push the Back/Reset button.
On the display, you see your current location in the menu, for example M3.2.1. You also see
the name of the group or item in your current location.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Main menu Submenus Main menu Submenus Main menu Submenus
M1 Quick M1.1 Wizards M3 M4

(Content depends M3.1 Motor Settings M4.1 Active Faults
setup on P1.2, App select.) Parameters Diagnostics
USER INTERFACES
M3.2 M4.2 Reset Faults

Start/Stop Setup
M2 Monitor M2.1 Multimonitor M3.3 References M4.3 Fault history

M3.4 M4.4 Total Counters
M2.2 Trend Curve
Ramps and Brakes
M3.5
M2.3 Basic M4.5 Trip Counters
I/O Configuration
M2.4 I/O M3.6 M4.6 Software Info
FB Data Mapping
M2.5
M3.7 Prohibit Freq M5 M5.1
Temperat. inputs
I/O and I/O and Hardware
M2.6
M3.8 Supervisions Hardware M5.2...M5.4
Extras/Advanced
Slots C,D,E
M2.7 M3.9 Protections
Timer Functions M5.5 Real Time Clock
Fig. 16: The basic menu structure of the AC drive

M2.8 M3.10
PID Controller Automatic Reset M5.6 Power unit sett.
M2.9 M3.12

Ext PID Controller Timer Functions M5.7 Keypad
M2.10 Multi-Pump M3.13 PID Controller
M5.8 RS-485
M2.11 Mainten.count. M3.14 Ext PID Ctrl
M6 User M6.1
M3.15 Multi-Pump Language select.
M2.12 Fieldbus data Settings
M6.5
M3.16 Mainten. cntrs Parameter Backup
M6.7 Drive Name
M3.17 Fire Mode
M7
M3.18 Motor Preheat
Favourites
M3.20
Mechanical Brake M8 M8.1 User Level
M3.21 Pump Control User Levels
M8.2 Access Code
VACON · 75
3
3.2 USING THE GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
A B C D E
STOP READY I/O

F
Main Menu
G
ID: M1
Quick Setup
( 17 )
Monitor H
( 5 )
Parameters
( 12 )
Fig. 17: The main menu of the graphical display
A. The first status field: STOP/RUN F. The location field: the parameter ID
B. The rotation direction number and the current location in the
C. The second status field: READY/NOT menu
READY/FAULT G. An activated group or item: push OK to
D. The alarm field: ALARM/- go in
E. The control place: PC/IO/KEYPAD/ H. The number of items in the group in
FIELDBUS question
3.2.1 EDITING THE VALUES

On the graphical display, there are 2 different procedures to edit the value of an item.
Usually, you can set only 1 value for a parameter. Make a selection from a list of text values
or from a range of numerical values.
CHANGING THE TEXT VALUE OF A PARAMETER

1 Find the parameter.
STOP READY I/O
Start / Stop Setup
ID:172 M3.2.1
Rem Control Place

I/O Control
KeypadStopButton
Yes
Start Function
Ramping
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

USER INTERFACES VACON · 77
2 To go to the Edit mode, push the OK button 2 times

or push the arrow button Right. STOP READY I/O
Rem Control Place
ID: M3.2.1
Edit
Help
Add to favourites
3 To set a new value, push the arrow buttons Up and

Down. STOP READY I/O
Rem Control Place
ID: M3.2.1
FieldbusCTRL
I/O Control
4 To accept the change, push the OK button. To

ignore the change, use the Back/Reset button.
EDITING THE NUMERICAL VALUES

STOP READY I/O
Frequency Ref
ID:101 P3.3.1.1
MaxFreqReference
0.00 Hz
MinFreqReference
50.00 Hz
PosFreqRefLimit
320.00 Hz
2 Go to the Edit mode.

STOP READY I/O
MinFreqReference
ID:101 P3.3.1.1
0.00 Hz
Min: 0.00Hz
Max: 50.00Hz

3 If the value is numerical, move from digit to digit

with the arrow buttons Left and Right. Change the STOP READY I/O
digits with the arrow buttons Up and Down. MinFreqReference

ID:101 P3.3.1.1
00.00 Hz
Min: 0.00Hz
Max: 50.00Hz
4 To accept the change, push the OK button. To

ignore the change, go back to the level where you STOP READY I/O
were before with the Back/Reset button. MinFreqReference

ID:101 P3.3.1.1
11.00 Hz
Min: 0.00Hz
Max: 50.00Hz
THE SELECTION OF MORE THAN 1 VALUE

Some parameters let you to make a selection of more than 1 value. Make a checkbox
selection at each value you wish to activate.
1 Find the parameter. There is a symbol on the
display when a checkbox selection is possible. STOP READY I/O
Interval 1
ID:1466 P3.12.1.3
ON Time
00:00:00
OFF Time
00:00:00
Days
0
A
A. The symbol
of the
checkbox
selection
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

2 To move in the list of values, use the arrow buttons

Up and Down. STOP READY I/O
Days
ID: M 3.12.1.3.1
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
3 To add a value into your selection, tick the box that

is next to it with the arrow button Right. STOP READY I/O
Days
ID: M 3.12.1.3.1
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
3.2.2 RESETTING A FAULT

To reset a fault, you can use the Reset button or the parameter Reset Faults. See the
instructions in 10.1 A fault comes into view.
3.2.3 THE FUNCT BUTTON

You can use the FUNCT button for 4 functions.
• To have an access to the Control page.

• To easily change between the Local and Remote control places.
• To change the rotation direction.
• To quickly edit a parameter value.
The selection of the control place determines from where the AC drive takes the start and
stop commands. All the control places have a parameter for the selection of the frequency
reference source. The Local control place is always the keypad. The Remote control place is
I/O or Fieldbus. You can see the current control place on the status bar of the display.
It is possible to use I/O A, I/O B and Fieldbus as Remote control places. I/O A and Fieldbus
have the lowest priority. You can make a selection of them with P3.2.1 (Remote Control
Place). I/O B can bypass the Remote control places I/O A and Fieldbus with a digital input.
You can make a selection of the digital input with parameter P3.5.1.7 (I/O B Control Force).
The keypad is always used as a control place when the control place is Local. Local control
has higher priority than Remote control. For example, when you are in Remote control, if
parameter P3.5.1.7 bypasses the control place with a digital input, and you make a selection
of Local, Keypad becomes the control place. Use the FUNCT button or P3.2.2 Local/Remote
to change between the Local and Remote control.

CHANGING THE CONTROL PLACE

1 Anywhere in the menu structure, push the FUNCT
button. STOP READY Keypad
Main Menu
ID: M1
Monitor
( 12 )
Parameters
( 21 )
Diagnostics
( 6 )
2 To make a selection of the Local/Remote, use the

arrow buttons Up and Down. Push the OK button. STOP READY Keypad
Choose action
ID:1805
Change direction
Control page
Local/Remote
3 To make a selection of Local or Remote, use the

arrow buttons Up and Down again. To accept the STOP READY Keypad
selection, push the OK button. Local/Remote

ID:211
Local
Remote
4 If you changed Remote control place to Local, that

is, the keypad, give a keypad reference. STOP READY I/O
Main Menu
ID: M1
Monitor
( 12 )
Parameters
( 21 )
Diagnostics
( 6 )
After the selection, the display goes back into the same location where it was when you
pushed the FUNCT button.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

GOING INTO THE CONTROL PAGE

It is easy to monitor the most important values in the Control page.
button. STOP READY I/O
Main Menu
ID: M1
Monitor
( 12 )
Parameters
( 21 )
Diagnostics
( 6 )
2 To make a selection of the Control page, push the

arrow buttons Up and Down. Go in with the OK STOP READY Keypad
button. The control page opens. Choose action

ID:1805
Change direction
Control page
Local/Remote
3 If you use the Local control place and the keypad

reference, you can set P3.3.1.8 Keypad Reference STOP READY Keypad
with the OK button. Keypad Reference

ID: 184
0.00Hz
Output Frequency Motor Torque
0.00Hz 0.00%
Motor Current Motor Power
0.00A 0.00%
4 To change the digits in the value, push the arrow

buttons Up and Down. Accept the change with the STOP READY Keypad
OK button. Keypad Reference

ID: 168
0.00Hz
Output Frequency Motor Torque
0.00Hz 0.00%
Motor Current Motor Power
0.00A 0.00%
See more information about Keypad Reference in 5.3 Group 3.3: References. If you use other
control places or reference values, the display shows the frequency reference, which you

cannot edit. The other values on the page are Multimonitoring values. You can make a
selection of the values that show up here (see instructions in 4.1.1 Multimonitor).
CHANGING THE ROTATION DIRECTION

You can change the rotation direction of the motor quickly with the FUNCT button.
NOTE!
The command Change direction is available in the menu only if the current control
place is Local.
Main Menu
ID: M1
Monitor
( 7 )
Parameters
( 15 )
Diagnostics
( 6 )
2 To make a selection of the Change direction, push

the arrow buttons Up and Down. Push the OK RUN READY Keypad
button. Choose action

ID:1805
Change direction
Control page
Local/Remote
3 Make a selection of a new rotation direction. The

current rotation direction blinks. Push the OK RUN READY Keypad
button. Choose action

ID:1805
Reverse
Forward
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4 The rotation direction changes immediately. You

can see that the arrow indication in the status field STOP READY I/O
of the display changes. Main Menu
ID: M1
Monitor
( 7 )
Parameters
( 15 )
Diagnostics
( 6 )
THE QUICK EDIT FUNCTION

With the Quick edit function, you can have a quick access to a parameter by typing the ID
number of the parameter.
button.
2 Push the arrow buttons Up and Down to make a
selection of Quick Edit and accept with the OK
button.
3 Write the ID number of a parameter or monitoring
value. Push OK. The display shows the parameter
value in the edit mode and the monitoring value in
the monitoring mode.
3.2.4 COPYING THE PARAMETERS

NOTE!
This function is available only in the graphical display.

Before you can copy parameters from the control panel to the drive, you must stop the drive.
COPYING THE PARAMETERS OF AN AC DRIVE

Use this function to copy parameters from a drive to another.
1 Save the parameters to the control panel.
2 Detach the control panel and connect it to another
drive.
3 Download the parameters to the new drive with the
command Restore from keypad.

SAVING THE PARAMETERS TO THE CONTROL PANEL

1 Go into the User settings menu.
STOP READY Keypad
Main Menu
ID: M6
I/O and Hardware

( 9 )
User settings
( 4 )
Favourites
( 0 )
2 Go into the Parameter backup submenu.

STOP READY Keypad
User settings
ID: M6.5
Language selection
English
Parameter backup
( 7 )
Drive name
Drive
3 Use the arrow buttons Up and Down to make a

selection of a function. Accept the selection with STOP READY Keypad
the OK button. Parameter backup

ID: M6.5.1
Restore factory defaults
Save to keypad
Restore from keypad
The command Restore factory defaults brings back the parameter settings that were made
at the factory. With the command Save to keypad you can copy all the parameters to the
control panel. The command Restore from keypad copies all the parameters from the
control panel to the drive.
The parameters that you cannot copy if the drives have a different size
If you replace the control panel of a drive with a control panel from a drive that is of a
different size, the values of these parameters do not change.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

• Motor Nominal Current (P3.1.1.4)

• Motor Nominal Voltage (P3.1.1.1)
• Motor Nominal Speed (P3.1.1.3)
• Motor Nominal Power (P3.1.1.6)
• Motor Nominal Frequency (P3.1.1.2)
• Motor Cos Phii (P3.1.1.5)
• Switching Frequency (P3.1.2.3)
• Motor Current Limit (P3.1.3.1)
• Stall Current Limit (P3.9.3.2)
• Maximum Frequency (P3.3.1.2)
• Field Weakening Point Frequency (P3.1.4.2)
• U/f Midpoint Frequency (P3.1.4.4)
• Zero Frequency Voltage (P3.1.4.6)
• Start Magnetising Current (P3.4.3.1)
• DC Brake Current (P3.4.4.1)
• Flux Braking Current (P3.4.5.2)
• Motor Thermal Time Constant (P3.9.2.4)
3.2.5 COMPARING THE PARAMETERS

With this function, you can compare the current parameter set with 1 of these 4 sets.
• Set 1 (B6.5.4 Save to Set 1)

• Set 2 (B6.5.6 Save to Set 2)
• The defaults (P6.5.1 Restore Factory Defaults)
• The keypad set (P6.5.2 Save to Keypad)
See more about these parameters in Table 114 The parameter backup parameters in the user
settings menu.
NOTE!
If you have not saved the parameter set with which you want to compare the
current set, the display shows the text Comparing failed.
USING THE FUNCTION PARAMETER COMPARE

1 Go into Parameter Compare in the User settings
menu. STOP READY I/O
User Settings
ID: M6.6
Language Selection
English
Parameter Backup
(7)
Parameter Compare
(4)

2 Make a selection of the pair of sets. Push OK to

accept the selection. STOP READY I/O
Parameter Compare
ID: B6.6.1
Active set-Set 1
Active set-Set 2
Active set-Defaults
3 Make a selection of Activate and push OK.

STOP READY I/O
Active set-Set 1
ID: M6.6.1
Active
Help
Add to Favourites
4 Examine the comparing between the current values

and the values of the other set. STOP READY I/O
Active set-Set 1
ID:113
Motor Nom Currnt

0.56A
1.90A
Motor Cos Phi
0.68
1.74
A B C D
A. The current C. The current

value value
B. The value D. The value
of the other of the other
set set
3.2.6 HELP TEXTS

The graphical display can show help texts on many topics. All the parameters have a help
text.
The help texts are also available for the faults, alarms, and the Startup wizard.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

READING A HELP TEXT

1 Find the item about which you want to read.
STOP READY I/O
Digital Inputs
ID:403 M3.5.1.1
Ctrl Signal 1 A
Ctrl Signal 2 A
Ctrl Signal 1 B
2 Use the arrow buttons Up and Down to make a

selection of Help. STOP READY I/O
Ctrl signal 1 A
ID:403 M3.5.1.1
Edit
Help
Add to favourites
3 To open the help text, push the OK button.

STOP READY I/O
Ctrl signal 1 A
ID:403 M3.5.1.1
Start Signal 1 for control Place

I/O A. Start Signal 1
functionality chosen with I/O A
Logic in Start/Stop Setup Menu.
NOTE!
The help texts are always in English.
3.2.7 USING THE FAVOURITES MENU

If you use the same items frequently, you can add them into Favourites. You can collect a set
of parameters or monitoring signals from all the keypad menus.
See more about how to use the Favourites menu in Chapter 8.2 Favourites.
3.3 USING THE TEXT DISPLAY

You can also have the control panel with the text display for your user interface. The text
display and the graphical display have almost the same functions. Some functions are only
available in the graphical display.

The display shows the status of the motor and the AC drive. It also shows faults in the
operation of the motor and the drive. On the display, you see your current location in the
menu. You also see the name of the group or item in your current location. If the text is too
long for the display, the text scrolls to show the full text string.
A B
F E
Fig. 18: The main menu of the text display
A. The indicators of status D. The current location in the menu
B. The indicators of alarm and fault E. The indicators of the control place
C. The name of the group or item of the F. The indicators of the rotation direction
current location
3.3.1 EDITING THE VALUES
CHANGING THE TEXT VALUE OF A PARAMETER

Set the value of a parameter with this procedure.
1 Find the parameter. READY RUN ALARM FAULT
STOP
FWD REV I/O KEYPAD BUS
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

2 To go to the Edit mode, push the OK button.

READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
3 To set a new value, push the arrow buttons Up and READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
Down.
4 Accept the change with the OK button. To ignore

the change, go back to the level where you were
before with the Back/Reset button.
EDITING THE NUMERICAL VALUES

2 Go to the Edit mode.
3 Move from digit to digit with the arrow buttons Left
and Right. Change the digits with the arrow buttons
Up and Down.
4 Accept the change with the OK button. To ignore
the change, go back to the level where you were
before with the Back/Reset button.
3.3.2 RESETTING A FAULT

To reset a fault, you can use the Reset button or the parameter Reset Faults. See the
instructions in 10.1 A fault comes into view.
3.3.3 THE FUNCT BUTTON

You can use the FUNCT button for 4 functions.
• To have an access to the Control page.

• To easily change between the Local and Remote control places.
• To change the rotation direction.
• To quickly edit a parameter value.

The selection of the control place determines from where the AC drive takes the start and
stop commands. All the control places have a parameter for the selection of the frequency
reference source. The Local control place is always the keypad. The Remote control place is
I/O or Fieldbus. You can see the current control place on the status bar of the display.
It is possible to use I/O A, I/O B and Fieldbus as Remote control places. I/O A and Fieldbus
have the lowest priority. You can make a selection of them with P3.2.1 (Remote Control
Place). I/O B can bypass the Remote control places I/O A and Fieldbus with a digital input.
You can make a selection of the digital input with parameter P3.5.1.7 (I/O B Control Force).
The keypad is always used as a control place when the control place is Local. Local control
has higher priority than Remote control. For example, when you are in Remote control, if
parameter P3.5.1.7 bypasses the control place with a digital input, and you make a selection
of Local, Keypad becomes the control place. Use the FUNCT button or P3.2.2 Local/Remote
to change between the Local and Remote control.
CHANGING THE CONTROL PLACE

1 Anywhere in the menu structure, push the FUNCT FAULT
READY RUN STOP ALARM
button.
2 To make a selection of the Local/Remote, use the

arrow buttons Up and Down. Push the OK button.
3 To make a selection of Local or Remote, use the READY RUN ALARM FAULT
STOP
arrow buttons Up and Down again. To accept the
selection, push the OK button.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4 If you changed Remote control place to Local, that

is, the keypad, give a keypad reference.
After the selection, the display goes back into the same location where it was when you
pushed the FUNCT button.
GOING INTO THE CONTROL PAGE

It is easy to monitor the most important values in the Control page.
button.
2 To make a selection of the Control page, push the

arrow buttons Up and Down. Go in with the OK
button. The control page opens.
3 If you use the Local control place and the keypad READY RUN ALARM FAULT
STOP
reference, you can set P3.3.1.8 Keypad Reference
with the OK button.
See more information about the Keypad Reference in 5.3 Group 3.3: References). If you use
other control places or reference values, the display shows the frequency reference, which
you cannot edit. The other values on the page are Multimonitoring values. You can make a
selection of the values that show up here (see instructions in 4.1.1 Multimonitor).
CHANGING THE ROTATION DIRECTION

You can change the rotation direction of the motor quickly with the FUNCT button.

NOTE!
The command Change direction is available in the menu only if the current control
place is Local.
button.
2 To make a selection of the Change direction, push
the arrow buttons Up and Down. Push the OK
button.
3 Make a selection of a new rotation direction. The
current rotation direction blinks. Push the OK
button. The rotation direction changes immediately,
and the arrow indication in the status field of the
display changes.
THE QUICK EDIT FUNCTION

With the Quick edit function, you can have a quick access to a parameter by typing the ID
number of the parameter.
button.
2 Push the arrow buttons Up and Down to make a
selection of Quick Edit and accept with the OK
button.
3 Write the ID number of a parameter or monitoring
value. Push OK. The display shows the parameter
value in the edit mode and the monitoring value in
the monitoring mode.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

3.4 MENU STRUCTURE
Menu Function
Quick setup See Chapter 1.4 Description of the applications.
Monitor Multimonitor
Trend curve
Basic
I/O
Extras/Advanced
Timer functions
PID controller
External PID controller
Multipump
Maintenance counters
Fiedbus data
Parameters See Chapter 5 Parameters menu.
Diagnostics Active faults
Reset faults
Fault history
Total counters
Trip counters
Software info

Menu Function
I/O and hardware Basic I/O
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Real time clock
Power unit settings
Keypad
RS-485
Ethernet
User settings Language selections
Parameter backup *
Drive name
Parameter compare
Favourites * See Chapter 8.2 Favourites.
User levels See Chapter 8.3 User levels.
* = The function is not available in the control panel with a text display.
3.4.1 QUICK SETUP

The Quick Setup group includes the different wizards and quick setup parameters of the
Vacon 100 Application. More detailed information on the parameters of this group you will
find in chapter 1.3 First start-up and 2 Wizards.
3.4.2 MONITOR
MULTIMONITOR
With the Multimonitor function, you can collect 4 to 9 items to monitor. See 4.1.1
Multimonitor.
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

NOTE!
The Multimonitor menu is not available in the text display.
TREND CURVE
The Trend Curve function is a graphical presentation of 2 monitor values at the same time.
See 4.1.2 Trend curve.
BASIC
The basic monitoring values can include statuses, measurements, and the actual values of
parameters and signals. See 4.1.3 Basic.
I/O
It is possible to monitor the statuses and levels of the values of input and output signals. See
4.1.4 I/O.
EXTRAS/ADVANCED
You can monitor different advanced values, for example fieldbus values. See 4.1.6 Extras and
advanced.
TIMER FUNCTIONS
With this function, you can monitor the timer functions and the Real Time Clock. See 4.1.7
Timer functions monitoring.
PID CONTROLLER
With this function, you can monitor the PID controller values. See 4.1.8 PID controller
monitoring.
EXTERNAL PID CONTROLLER
Monitor the values that are related to the external PID controller. See 4.1.9 External PID
controller monitoring.
MULTI-PUMP
Use this function to monitor the values that are related to the operation of more than 1 drive.
See 4.1.10 Multipump monitoring.
MAINTENANCE COUNTERS
Monitor the values related to the maintenance counters. See 4.1.11 Maintenance counters.
FIELDBUS DATA
With this function, you see the fieldbus data as monitor values. Use this function, for
example, for monitoring during the fieldbus commissioning. See 4.1.12 Fieldbus data
monitoring.

3.5 VACON LIVE

Vacon Live is a PC tool for commissioning and maintenance of the Vacon® 10, Vacon® 20, and
Vacon® 100 AC drives). You can download Vacon Live from www.vacon.com.
The Vacon Live PC tool includes these functions.
• Parametrisation, monitoring, drive info, data logger, etc.

• The software download tool Vacon Loader
• RS-422 and Ethernet support
• Windows XP, Vista 7 and 8 support
• 17 languages: English, German, Spanish, Finnish, French, Italian, Russian, Swedish,
Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Slovak and Turkish
You can make the connection between the AC drive and the PC tool with the black USB/
RS-422 cable from Vacon or the Vacon 100 Ethernet cable. The RS-422 drivers are installed
automatically during the installation of Vacon Live. After you installed the cable, Vacon Live
finds the connected drive automatically.
See more on how to use Vacon Live in the help menu of the program.
Fig. 19: The Vacon Live PC tool
3 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

MONITORING MENU VACON · 97
4 MONITORING MENU
4.1 MONITOR GROUP
You can monitor the actual values of the parameters and signals. You can also monitor the
statuses and measurements. You can customise some of the values that you can monitor.
4.1.1 MULTIMONITOR
On the Multimonitor page, you can collect 4 to 9 items to monitor. Make a selection of the
number of items with the parameter 3.11.4 Multimonitor View. See more in chapter 5.11
Group 3.11: Application settings.
CHANGING THE ITEMS TO MONITOR

1 Go into the Monitor menu with the OK button.
STOP READY I/O
Main Menu
ID: M1
Quick Setup
(4)
Monitor
(12)
Parameters
(21)
2 Go into Multimonitor.
STOP READY I/O
Monitor
ID: M2.1
Multimonitor
Basic
(7)
Timer Functions
(13)
3 To replace an old item, activate it. Use the arrow

buttons. STOP READY I/O
Multimonitor
ID:25 FreqReference
FreqReference Output Freq Motor Speed
20.0 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.0 rpm
Motor Curre Motor Torque Motor Voltage
0.00A 0.00 % 0.0V
DC-link volt Unit Tempera Motor Tempera
0.0V 81.9°C 0.0%

VACON · 98 MONITORING MENU
4 To make a selection of a new item in the list, push

OK. STOP READY I/O
FreqReference
ID:1 M2.1.1.1
Output frequency 0.00 Hz

FreqReference 10.00 Hz
Motor Speed 0.00 rpm
Motor Current 0.00 A
Motor Torque 0.00 %
Motor Power 0.00 %
4.1.2 TREND CURVE

The Trend curve is a graphical presentation of 2 monitor values.
When you make a selection of a value, the drive starts to record the values. In the Trend
curve submenu, you can examine the trend curve, make the signal selections. You can also
give the minimum and maximum settings and the sampling interval, and use Autoscaling.
CHANGING THE VALUES

Change the monitoring values with this procedure.
1 In the Monitor menu, find the Trend curve submenu
and push OK. STOP READY I/O
Monitor
ID: M2.2
Multimonitor
Trend Curve
(7)
Basic
(13)
2 Go into the submenu View trend curve with the OK

Trend Curve
ID: M2.2.1
View Trend Curve

(2)
Sampling interval
100 ms
Channel 1 min
-1000
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

3 You can monitor only 2 values as trend curves at

the same time. The current selections, STOP READY I/O
FreqReference and Motor speed, are at the bottom

of the display. To make a selection of the current
value that you wish to change, use the arrow
buttons up and down. Push OK.
FreqReference 0.00Hz
Motor Speed 0rpm
4 Go through the list of the monitoring values with

the arrow buttons. STOP READY I/O
FreqReference
ID:3 V2.2.1.1.4
Output frequency
FreqReference
Motor Speed
Motor Current
Motor Torque
Motor Shaft Power
5 Make a selection and push OK.

STOP READY I/O
Motor Current 0.00A

Motor Speed 0rpm
STOPPING THE PROGRESSION OF THE CURVE

The Trend curve function also lets you to stop the curve and read the current values. After,
you can start the progression of the curve again.

1 In Trend curve view, make a curve active with the

arrow button Up. The frame of the display turns RUN READY ALARM I/O
bold.
Motor Current 0.02A

Motor Speed -317rpm
2 Push OK at the target point of the curve.

RUN READY ALARM I/O
Motor Current 0.02A

Motor Speed -327rpm
3 A vertical line comes into view on the display. The

values at the bottom of the display agree to the RUN READY ALARM I/O
location of the line.
Motor Current 0.01A

Motor Speed -252rpm
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4 To move the line to see the values of some other

location, use the arrow buttons Left and Right. RUN READY ALARM I/O
Motor Current 0.01A

Motor Speed -254rpm
Table 20: The trend curve parameters
Go into this menu to

M2.2.1 View Trend curve monitor values in a
curve form.
Set the sampling

P2.2.2 Sampling interval 100 432000 ms 100 2368
interval.
Used in scaling by
P2.2.3 Channel 1 min -214748 1000 -1000 2369 default. Adjustments
can be necessary.
Used in scaling by
P2.2.4 Channel 1 max -1000 214748 1000 2370 default. Adjustments
can be necessary.
Used in scaling by
P2.2.5 Channel 2 min -214748 1000 -1000 2371 default. Adjustments
can be necessary.
Used in scaling by
P2.2.6 Channel 2 max -1000 214748 1000 2372 default. Adjustments
can be necessary.
If the value of this

parameter is 1, the
P2.2.7 Autoscale 0 1 0 2373 signal is automatically
scaled between the
min and max values.
4.1.3 BASIC
You can see the basic monitoring values and their related data in the next table.

NOTE!
Only the standard I/O board statuses are available in the Monitor menu. You can
find the statuses of all the I/O board signals as raw data in the I/O and Hardware
menu.
Do a check of the statuses of the expander I/O board in the I/O and Hardware menu when the
system asks you to do it.
Table 21: Items in the monitoring menu
Index Monitoring value Unit Scale ID Description
V2.3.1 Output frequency Hz 0.01 1 The output frequency to motor
Frequency The frequency reference to motor control

V2.3.2 Hz 0.01 25
reference
V2.3.3 Motor speed rpm 1 2 The actual speed of the motor in rpm
V2.3.4 Motor current A Varies 3
V2.3.5 Motor torque % 0.1 4 The calculated shaft torque
The calculated motor shaft power in

V2.3.7 Motor shaft power % 0.1 5
percentage
The calculated motor shaft power in kW or

V2.3.8 Motor shaft power kW/hp Varies 73 hp. The unit is set in the unit selection
parameter.
V2.3.9 Motor voltage V 0.1 6 The output voltage to motor
The measured voltage in the DC-link of the

V2.3.10 DC link voltage V 1 7
drive
The heatsink temperature in Celsius or

V2.3.11 Unit temperature °C 0.1 8
Fahrenheit
The calculated motor temperature in

Motor
V2.3.12 % 0.1 9 percentage of the nominal working
temperature
temperature
The status of the Motor preheat function
V2.3.13 Motor Preheat 1 1228

0 = OFF
1 = Heating (feeding DC-current)
V2.3.14 Torque reference % 0.1 18 The final torque reference to motor control
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4.1.4 I/O
Table 22: I/O signal monitoring
Shows the status of the digital inputs 1-3 in

V2.4.1 Slot A DIN 1, 2, 3 1 15
slot A (standard I/O)
Shows the status of the digital inputs 4-6 in

V2.4.2 Slot A DIN 4, 5, 6 1 16
slot A (standard I/O)
Shows the status of the relay inputs 1-3 in

V2.4.3 Slot B RO 1, 2, 3 1 17
slot B
The input signal as a percentage of the used

V2.4.4 Analogue input 1 % 0.01 59
range. Slot A.1 as default.

range. Slot A.2 as default.

range. Slot D.1 as default.

range. Slot D.2 as default.

range. Slot E.1 as default.

range. Slot E.2 as default.
The analogue output signal as a percentage

V2.4.10 Slot A AO1 % 0.01 81
of the used range. Slot A (standard I/O)
4.1.5 TEMPERATURE INPUTS

NOTE!
This parameter group is visible when you have an option board for temperature
measurement (OPT-BH).

Table 23: Monitoring the temperature inputs
The measured value of temperature input 1.

The list of temperature inputs is made of the
first 6 available temperature inputs. The list
starts from slot A and ends in slot E. If an
Temperature
V2.5.1 °C 0.1 50 input is available but no sensor is connected,
input 1
the list shows the maximum value because
the measured resistance is endless. To make
the value go to its minimum value, hardwire
the input.
Temperature The measured value of temperature input 2.

V2.5.2 °C 0.1 51
input 2 See more above.

V2.5.3 °C 0.1 52

V2.5.4 °C 0.1 69

V2.5.5 °C 0.1 70

V2.5.6 °C 0.1 71
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4.1.6 EXTRAS AND ADVANCED
Table 24: Monitoring of the advanced values
The bit-coded word
B1 = Ready
B2 = Run
B3 = Fault
V2.6.1 Drive Status Word 1 43 B6 = RunEnable
B7 = AlarmActive
B10 = DC current in stop
B11 = DC brake active
B12 = RunRequest
B13 = MotorRegulatorActive
Bit-coded data about ready criteria. This data

is useful for monitoring when the drive is not
in the Ready state. The values are visible as
checkboxes on the graphical display. If a box
is ticked, the value is active.
V2.6.2 Ready status 1 78 B0 = RunEnable high

B1 = No fault active
B2 = Charge switch closed
B3 = DC voltage within limits
B4 = Power manager initialised
B5 = Power unit is not blocking start
B6 = System software is not blocking start
Bit-coded statuses of the application. The

values are visible as checkboxes on graphical
display. If a box is ticked, the value is active.
B0 = Interlock 1
B1 = Interlock 2
B2 = Reserved
B3 = Ramp 2 active
B4 = Mechanical brake control
Application Status B5 = I/O A control active
V2.6.3 1 89
Word1 B6 = I/O B control active
B7 = Fieldbus Control Active
B8 = Local control active
B9 = PC control active
B10 = Preset frequencies active
B11 = Jogging active
B12 = Fire Mode active
B13 = Motor Preheat active
B14 = Quick stop active
B15 = Drive stopped from keypad

Bit-coded statuses of the application. The

values are visible as checkboxes on graphical
display. If a box is ticked, the value is active.
B0 = Acc/Dec prohibited
Application Status B1 = Motor switch open
V2.6.4 1 90
Word2 B5 = Jockey pump active
B6 = Priming pump active
B7 = Input pressure supervision (Alarm/
Fault)
B8 = Frost protection (Alarm/Fault)
B9 = Autocleaning active
A 16-bit word where each bit shows the

status of 1 digital input. 6 digital inputs from
V2.6.5 DIN Status Word 1 1 56 each slot are read. Word 1 starts from the
input 1 in slot A (bit0) and goes all the way to
input 4 in slot C (bit15).
A 16-bit word where each bit shows the

status of 1 digital input. 6 digital inputs from
V2.6.6 DIN Status Word 2 1 57 each slot are read. Word 2 starts from the
input 5 in slot C (bit0) and goes all the way to
input 6 in slot E (bit13).
The monitor value of the motor current with

fixed number of decimals and less filtering.
This can be used for example with fieldbus to
Motor current 1
V2.6.7 0.1 45 get the correct value so that the frame size
decimal
does not have an effect. or for monitoring
when less filtering time is needed for the
motor current.
Shows the momentary frequency reference

source.
0 = PC
1 = Preset Freqs
3 = Fieldbus
Frequency 4 = AI1
V2.6.8 1 1495 5 = AI2
reference source
6 = AI1+AI2
7 = PID Controller
8 = Motor Potentiom.
9 = Joystick
10 = Jogging
100 = Not defined
101 = Alarm,PresetFreq
102 = Auto-cleaning
Last active fault The fault code of the last fault that has not
V2.6.9 1 37
code been reset.
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The fault ID of the last fault that has not been

V2.6.10 Last active fault ID 1 95
reset.
Last active alarm The alarm code of the last alarm that has not
V2.6.11 1 74
code been reset.
Last active alarm The alarm ID of the last alarm that has not
V2.6.12 1 94
ID been reset.
4.1.7 TIMER FUNCTIONS MONITORING

Monitor the values of Timer functions and the Real Time Clock.
Table 25: Monitoring of the timer functions
You can monitor the statuses of the 3 time

V2.7.1 TC 1, TC 2, TC 3 1 1441
channels (TC)
V2.7.2 Interval 1 1 1442 The status of the timer interval
The remaining time on the timer if the timer

V2.7.7 Timer 1 s 1 1447
is active

V2.7.8 Timer 2 s 1 1448
is active

V2.7.9 Timer 3 s 1 1449
is active
V2.7.10 Real time clock 1450 hh:mm:ss

4.1.8 PID CONTROLLER MONITORING
Table 26: Monitoring of the values of the PID controller
As is set The setpoint value of the PID controller in

in process units. You can use a parameter to
P3.13.1.7 make the selection of the process unit.
(See 5.13
V2.8.1 PID1 setpoint Varies 20
Group
3.13: PID
controller
)
As is set The feedback value of the PID controller in

V2.8.2 PID1 feedback Varies in 21 process units. You can use a parameter to
P3.13.1.7 make the selection of the process unit.
The error value of the PID controller. It is the

As is set
deviation of feedback from the setpoint in
V2.8.3 PID1 error value Varies in 22
process units. You can use a parameter to
P3.13.1.7
make the selection of the process unit.
The PID output as a percentage (0..100%). It

is possible to give this value to the motor
V2.8.4 PID1 output % 0.01 23
control (frequency reference) or to an
analogue output.
0 = Stopped
1 = Running
V2.8.5 PID1 status 1 24
3 = Sleep mode
4 = In dead band (see 5.13 Group 3.13: PID
controller)
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4.1.9 EXTERNAL PID CONTROLLER MONITORING
Table 27: Monitoring of the values of the external PID controller
As set in The setpoint value of the external PID

P3.14.1.1 controller in process units. You can use a
0 (See parameter to make the selection of the
5.14 process unit.
Group
V2.9.1 ExtPID setpoint Varies 83
3.14:
External
PID
controller
)
The feedback value of the external PID

As set in
controller in process units. You can use a
V2.9.2 ExtPID feedback Varies P3.14.1.1 84
parameter to make the selection of the
0
process unit.
The error value of the external PID

As set in controller. It is the deviation of feedback from
V2.9.3 ExtPID error value Varies P3.14.1.1 85 the setpoint in process units. You can use a
0 parameter to make the selection of the
process unit.
The external PID controller output as a

percentage (0..100%). It is possible to give
V2.9.4 ExtPID output % 0.01 86
this value to, for example, the analogue
output.
0=Stopped
V2.9.5 ExtPID status 1 87 1=Running
2=In dead band (see 5.14 Group 3.14: External
PID controller)
4.1.10 MULTIPUMP MONITORING
Table 28: Multipump monitoring
The number of motors that operate when the

V2.10.1 Motors running 1 30
Multi-pump function is used.
The system tells you if an autochange is

V2.10.2 Autochange 1 1113
necessary.

4.1.11 MAINTENANCE COUNTERS
Table 29: Maintenance counter monitoring
The status of the maintenance counter as

revolutions multiplied by 1000, or in hours.
Maintenance
V2.11.1 h/ kRev Varies 1101 For the configuration and activation of this
counter 1
counter, see 5.16 Group 3.16: Maintenance
counters.
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

4.1.12 FIELDBUS DATA MONITORING
Table 30: Fieldbus data monitoring
The fieldbus control word that the application

uses in bypass mode/format. Depending on
V2.12.1 FB Control Word 1 874
the fieldbus type or profile, the data can be
modified before it is sent to the application.
The speed reference scaled between the

minimum and the maximum frequency at the
FB Speed moment when the application received it. You
V2.12.2 Varies 875
Reference can change the minimum and the maximum
frequencies after the application received the
reference without an effect on the reference.
The raw value of process data in a 32-bit

V2.12.3 FB data in 1 1 876
signed format

V2.12.4 FB data in 2 1 877
signed format

V2.12.5 FB data in 3 1 878
signed format

V2.12.6 FB data in 4 1 879
signed format

V2.12.7 FB data in 5 1 880
signed format

V2.12.8 FB data in 6 1 881
signed format

V2.12.9 FB data in 7 1 882
signed format

V2.12.10 FB data in 8 1 883
signed format
The fieldbus status word that the application

sends in bypass mode/format. Depending on
V2.12.11 FB Status Word 1 864
the fieldbus type or profile, the data can be
modified before it is sent to the fieldbus.
The actual speed as a percentage. The value

0% agrees with the minimum frequency and
the value 100% agrees with the maximum
V2.12.12 FB Speed Actual 0.01 865
frequency. This is continuously updated
depending on the momentary min and max
frequencies and the output frequency.

V2.12.13 FB data out 1 1 866
signed format

V2.12.14 FB data out 2 1 867
signed format

Table 30: Fieldbus data monitoring

V2.12.15 FB data out 3 1 868
signed format

V2.12.16 FB data out 4 1 869
signed format

V2.12.17 FB data out 5 1 870
signed format

V2.12.18 FB data out 6 1 871
signed format

V2.12.19 FB data out 7 1 872
signed format

V2.12.20 FB data out 8 1 873
signed format
4 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

PARAMETERS MENU VACON · 113
5 PARAMETERS MENU
5.1 GROUP 3.1: MOTOR SETTINGS
Table 31: Motor nameplate parameters
Find the value Un on

motor.
Motor Nominal
P3.1.1.1 Varies Varies V Varies 110
Voltage
Star.
P3.1.1.2 Find the value fn on the

Motor Nominal rating plate of the
8.00 320.00 Hz 50 / 60 111
Frequency motor.
Find the value nn on

Motor Nominal
P3.1.1.3 24 19200 rpm Varies 112 the rating plate of the
Speed
motor.
Find the value In on the

Motor Nominal
P3.1.1.4 IH * 0.1 IH * 2 A Varies 113 rating plate of the
Current
motor.
Find the value on the

Motor Cos Phi
P3.1.1.5 0.30 1.00 Varies 120 rating plate of the
(Power Factor)
motor.
Find the value In on the

Motor Nominal
P3.1.1.6 Varies Varies kW Varies 116 rating plate of the
Power
motor.

VACON · 114 PARAMETERS MENU
Table 32: Motor control settings
0 = Frequency control
P3.1.2.1
(open loop)
Control Mode 0 2 0 600 1 = Speed control
(open loop)
2 = Torque control
(open loop)
P3.1.2.2
Motor Type 0 1 0 650 0 = Induction motor
1 = PM motor
If you increase the

switching frequency,
the capacity of the AC
drive reduces. To
reduce capacitive
currents in the motor
P3.1.2.3 Switching Frequency 1.5 Varies kHz Varies 601 cable, when the cable
is long, we recommend
that you use a low
switching frequency.
To reduce the motor
noise, use a high
switching frequency.
Identification
motor and speed.
P3.1.2.4
Identification 0 2 0 631 0 = No action
1 = At standstill
2 = With rotation
Before you do the

must set the motor
nameplate parameters
in the menu M3.1.1.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The magnetising
current (no-load
current) of the motor.
The magnetising
current identifies the
values of the U/f
P3.1.2.5 Magnetizing Current 0.0 2*IH A 0.0 612
parameters if they are
given before the
identification run. If the
value is set to 0, the
magnetising current is
calculated internally.
When you enable this

function, the drive does
not trip when the
motor switch is closed
P3.1.2.6
and opened, for
Motor Switch 0 1 0 653 example in a flying
start.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The function enables a

speed drop as a
P3.1.2.7
function of load. The
Load Drooping 0.00 20.00 % 0.00 620 load drooping is given
as a percentage of the
nominal speed at a
nominal load.
Use load drooping to

get a dynamic speed
drooping when the load
changes. This
P3.1.2.8 Load Drooping Time 0.00 2.00 s 0.00 656
parameter gives the
time during which the
speed is restored 63%
of the change.
0 = Normal. The load

drooping factor is
constant through the
frequency range.
P3.1.2.9 Load Drooping Mode 0 1 0 1534
1 = Linear removal.
The load drooping is
removed linearly from
the nominal frequency
to zero frequency.

P3.1.2.10
Overvoltage Control 0 1 1 607 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P3.1.2.11
Undervoltage Control 0 1 1 608 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
To save energy and to

lower the motor noise,
the drive searches for
the minimum motor
current. You can use
this function for
example in fan and
P3.1.2.12 Energy Optimization 0 1 0 666 pump processes. Do
not use the function
with fast PID controlled
processes.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P3.1.2.13 Use this to adjust the

stator voltage in
Stator Voltage Adjust 50.0 150.0 % 100.0 659
permanent magnet
motors.
P3.1.2.14
Overmodulation 0 1 1 1515 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 33: Motor limit settings
P3.1.3.1 The maximum motor

current from the AC
Motor Current Limit IH*0.1 IS A Varies 107
drive
The maximum torque

P3.1.3.2 Motor Torque Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1287 limit of the motoring
side
The maximum torque

Generator Torque
P3.1.3.3 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1288 limit of the generating
Limit
side
The maximum power

P3.1.3.4 Motor Power Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1290 limit of the motoring
side
The maximum power

Generator Power
P3.1.3.5 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1289 limit of the generating
Limit
side

Table 34: Open loop settings
The type of the U/f

curve between zero
frequency and the field
P3.1.4.1
weakening point.
U/f Ratio 0 2 0 108
0=Linear
1=Squared
2=Programmable
The field weakening

point is the output
Field Weakening frequency at which the
P3.1.4.2 8.00 P3.3.1.2 Hz Varies 602
Point Frequency output voltage reaches
the field weakening
point voltage.
P3.1.4.3 The voltage at the field

Voltage at Field weakening point as a
10.00 200.00 % 100.00 603
Weakening Point percentage of the
motor nominal voltage.
If the value of P3.1.4.1

is programmable, this
U/f Midpoint
P3.1.4.4 0.00 P3.1.4.2. Hz Varies 604 parameter gives the
Frequency
middle point frequency
of the curve.
If the value of P3.1.4.1

is programmable, this
P3.1.4.5 U/f Midpoint Voltage 0.0 100.0 % 100.0 605 parameter gives the
middle point voltage of
the curve.
This parameter gives

the zero frequency
Zero Frequency voltage of the U/f
P3.1.4.6 0.00 40.00 % Varies 606
Voltage curve. The default
value is different for
different unit sizes.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 34: Open loop settings
A checkbox
selection
B0 = Search the shaft
frequency only from
P3.1.4.7 the same direction as
Flying Start Options 0 63 0 1590 the frequency
reference
B1 = Disable AC
scanning
B4 = Use the frequency
reference for the initial
guess
B5 = Disable DC pulses
Flying Start Scan As a percentage of the

P3.1.4.8 0.0 100.0 % 45.0 1610
Current motor nominal current.
P3.1.4.9
Auto Torque Boost 0 1 0 109 0=Disabled
1=Enabled
Scaling factor for the

motoring side IR-
Torque Boost Motor
P3.1.4.10 0.0 100.0 % 100.0 665 compensation when
Gain
the torque boost is
used.
Scaling factor for the

generating side IR-
Torque Boost
P3.1.4.11 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 667 compensation when
Generator Gain
the torque boost is
used.
M3.1.4.12 I/f Start This menu includes 3 parameters. See the table below.

Table 35: I/f start parameters
P3.1.4.12.1
I/f Start 0 1 0 534 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P3.1.4.12.2 The output frequency

0.5 * 0.2 * limit below which the
I/f Start Frequency 5.0 535
P3.1.1.2 P3.1.1.2 set I/f start current is
fed to motor.
P3.1.4.12.3 The current that is fed

to the motor when the
I/f Start Current 0.0 100.0 % 80.0 536
I/f Start function is
activated.
Table 36: Torque stabilator parameters
P3.1.4.13.1 The gain of the torque

Torque Stabilator stabilator in an open
0.0 500.0 % 50.0 1412
Gain loop control operation.
The gain of the torque

P3.1.4.13.2
Torque Stabilator stabilator at field
Gain at Field 0.0 500.0 % 50.0 1414 weakening point in an
Weakening Point open loop control
operation.
P3.1.4.13.3 The damping time

Torque Stabilator
constant of the torque
Damping Time 0.0005 1.0000 s 0.0050 1413
stabilator.
Constant
P3.1.4.13.4 Torque Stabilator The damping time

Damping Time constant of the torque
0.0005 1.0000 s 0.0050 1735
Constant (for PM stabilator for a PM
motors) motor.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.2 GROUP 3.2: START/STOP SETUP
Table 37: Start/stop setup menu

(start/stop). Use this to
change back to remote
control from Vacon
Remote Control Live, for example if the
P3.2.1 0 1 0* 172
Place control panel is
broken.
0 = I/O control
Switch between the

local and remote
control places.
P3.2.2 Local/Remote 0 1 0* 211
0 = Remote
1 = Local
0 = The Stop button

P3.2.3 Keypad Stop Button 0 1 0 114 always enabled (Yes)
1 = Limited function of
the Stop button (No)
P3.2.4 Start Function 0 1 0 505 0 = Ramping

1 = Flying start
P3.2.5
Stop Function 0 1 0 506 0 = Coasting
1 = Ramping

Logic = 0
Ctrl sgn 1 = Forward
Ctrl sgn 2 = Backward
Logic = 1
(edge)
Ctrl sgn 2 = Inverted
Stop
Ctrl sgn 3 = Bckwrd
(edge)
P3.2.6
I/O A Start/Stop Logic = 2
0 4 2* 300
Logic
(edge)
Ctrl sgn 2 = Bckwrd
(edge)
Logic = 3
Ctrl sgn 1 = Start
Ctrl sgn 2 = Reverse
Logic = 4
Ctrl sgn 1 = Start
(edge)
Ctrl sgn 2 = Reverse
I/O B Start/Stop See above.

P3.2.7 0 4 2* 363
Logic
0 = A rising edge is
P3.2.8 Fieldbus Start Logic 0 1 0 889
necessary
1 = State
The delay between the

start command and the
P3.2.9 Start Delay 0.000 60.000 s 0.000 524
actual start of the
drive.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The selection of copy

settings when you go
from Remote to Local
(keypad) control.
Remote to Local
P3.2.10 0 2 2 181
Function
0 = Keep Run
1 = Keep Run &
Reference
2 = Stop
* = The selection of the application with parameter P1.2 Application gives the default value.
See the default values in Chapter 11 Appendix 1.

5.3 GROUP 3.3: REFERENCES
Table 38: Frequency reference parameters
Minimum Frequency The minimum

P3.3.1.1 0.00 P3.3.1.2. Hz 0.00 101
Reference frequency reference
Maximum Frequency 50.00 / The maximum

P3.3.1.2 P3.3.1.1. 320.00 Hz 102
Reference 60.00 frequency reference
The final frequency

Positive Frequency
P3.3.1.3 -320.0 320.0 Hz 320.00 1285 reference limit for the
Reference Limit
positive direction.
The final frequency

reference limit for the
negative direction. Use
Negative Frequency
P3.3.1.4 -320.0 320.0 Hz -320.00 1286 this parameter for
Reference Limit
example to prevent the
motor from running in
the reverse direction.
Selection of the
reference source when
the control place is I/O
A.
1 = Keypad reference
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID reference
7 = Motor
potentiometer
I/O Control
8 = Joystick reference
P3.3.1.5 Reference A 0 19 5* 117
9 = Jogging reference
Selection
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10

value.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection of the
the control place is I/O
I/O Control
B. See above. You can
P3.3.1.6 Reference B 0 9 4* 131
force the I/O B control
Selection
place to be active only
with a digital input
(P3.5.1.7).
Selection of the
the control place is
keypad.
1 = Keypad
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID reference
Keypad Control 7 = Motor
P3.3.1.7 0 19 2* 121
Reference Selection potentiometer
8 = Joystick
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10
You can adjust the

frequency reference on
P3.3.1.8 Keypad Reference P3.3.1.1 P3.3.1.2. Hz 0.00 184
the keypad with this
parameter.
The rotation direction

of the motor when the
P3.3.1.9 Keypad Direction 0 1 0 123
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse

Selection of the
the control place is
Fieldbus.
0 = Preset frequency 0
1 = Keypad
2 = Fieldbus
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID reference
Fieldbus Control 7 = Motor
P3.3.1.10 0 19 3* 122
Reference Selection potentiometer
8 = Joystick
10 = Block Out.1
11 = Block Out.2
12 = Block Out.3
13 = Block Out.4
14 = Block Out.5
15 = Block Out.6
16 = Block Out.7
17 = Block Out.8
18 = Block Out.9
19 = Block Out.10
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 39: Torque reference parameters
The selection of torque

reference. The torque
reference is scaled
between the values of
P3.3.2.2. and P3.3.2.3.
0 = Not used
1 = Keypad
2 = Joystick
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI3
6 = AI4
7 = AI5
8 = AI6
9 = ProcessDataIn 1
10 = ProcessDataIn 2
Torque Reference
P3.3.2.1 0 26 0* 641 14 = ProcessDataIn 6
Selection
17 = Block Out.1
18 = Block Out.2
19 = Block Out.3
20 = Block Out.4
21 = Block Out.5
22 = Block Out.6
23 = Block Out.7
24 = Block Out.8
25 = Block Out.9
26 = Block Out.10
If you use a fieldbus

protocol where the
torque reference can
be given in Nm units,
you must set
ProcessDataIn1 as the
value to this
parameter.
P3.3.2.2 The torque reference

Torque Minimum that agrees to the
-300.0 300.0 % 0.0 643
Reference minimum value of the
reference signal.

Table 39: Torque reference parameters
The torque reference

that agrees to the
P3.3.2.3 maximum value of the
Torque Maximum reference signal. This
-300.0 300.0 % 100.0 642
Reference value is used as the
maximum torque
reference for negative
and positive values.
Gives the filtering time

Torque Reference
P3.3.2.4 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1244 for the final torque
Filter Time
reference.
To ignore the small

values around 0 of the
torque reference, set
this value to be bigger
Torque Reference than 0. When the
P3.3.2.5 0.0 300.0 % 0.0 1246
Dead Zone reference signal is
between 0 and 0 ± the
value of this
parameter, the torque
reference is set to 0.
Used when P3.3.2.1. is

set to 1. The value of
Keypad Torque
P3.3.2.6 0.0 P3.3.2.3 % 0.0 1439 this parameter is
Reference
limited between
P3.3.2.3. and P3.3.2.2.

output frequency limit
mode for the torque
P3.3.2.7 control.
Torque Control
0 1 0 1278
Frequency Limit
0 = Pos/Neg frequency
limits
1 = frequency
reference
Torque Control Open This menu includes 3 parameter. See table below.
M3.3.2.8
Loop
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 40: Torque control Open Loop parameters
The output frequency

Open Loop Torque limit below which the
P3.3.2.8.1 Control Minimum 0.0 P3.3.1.2 Hz 3.0 636 drive operates in the
Frequency frequency control
mode.
Gives the P gain for the

torque controller in the
open loop control
mode. The P Gain value
Open Loop Torque 1.0 causes a 1 Hz
P3.3.2.8.2 0.0 32000.0 0.01 639
Control P Gain change in the output
frequency when the
torque error is 1% of
the motor nominal
torque.
Gives the I gain for the

torque controller in the
open loop control
mode. The I Gain value
Open Loop Torque 1.0 causes the
P3.3.2.8.3 0.0 32000.0 2.0 640
Control I Gain integration to reach 1.0
Hz in 1 second when
the torque error is 1%
of the motor nominal
torque.

Table 41: Preset frequency parameters
0 = Binary coded
P3.3.3.1 1 = Number of inputs
Preset Frequency
0 1 0* 182
Mode The number of preset
speed digital inputs
that are active define
the preset frequency.
P3.3.3.2 The basic preset

frequency 0 when it is
Preset Frequency 0 P3.3.1.1 P3.3.1.2 Hz 5.00 180
set with P3.3.1.5.
P3.3.3.3 Make the selection

with digital input
Preset Frequency 1 P3.3.1.1 P3.3.1.2 Hz 10.00 * 105
Preset frequency
selection 0 (P3.3.3.10).

with digital input
Preset frequency

with digital inputs
Preset frequency
selection 0 & 1.

with digital input
Preset frequency

with digital inputs
Preset frequency
selection 0 & 2.

with digital inputs
Preset frequency
selection 1 & 2.

with digital inputs
Preset frequency
selection 0 & 1 & 2.
P3.3.3.10 A binary selector for

Preset Frequency DigIN Preset speeds (0-7).
419
Selection 0 SlotA.4 See parameters
P3.3.3.2 to P3.3.3.9.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 41: Preset frequency parameters

420
Selection 1 SlotA.5 See parameters
P3.3.3.2 to P3.3.3.9.

421
Selection 2 Slot0.1 See parameters
P3.3.3.2 to P3.3.3.9.
Table 42: Motor potentiometer parameters
FALSE = Not active

P3.3.4.1
TRUE = Active. The
Motor Potentiometer DigIN
418 motor potentiometer
UP Slot0.1
reference INCREASES
until the contact is
opened.
FALSE = Not active

P3.3.4.2
TRUE = Active. The
Motor Potentiometer DigIN
417 motor potentiometer
DOWN Slot0.1
reference DECREASES
until the contact is
opened.
The rate of change in

the motor
potentiometer
Motor Potentiometer
P3.3.4.3 0.1 500.0 Hz/s 10.0 331 reference when it is
Ramp Time
increased or decreased
with P3.3.4.1. or
P3.3.4.2.
The reset logic for the

motor potentiometer
frequency reference.
P3.3.4.4
Motor Potentiometer
0 2 1 367
Reset 0 = No reset
1 = Reset if stopped
2 = Reset if powered
down

Table 43: Joystick control parameters
0 = Not Used
P3.3.5.1 1 = AI1 (0-100%)
Joystick Signal 2 = AI2 (0-100%)
0 6 0 451
Selection 3 = AI3 (0-100%)
4 = AI4 (0-100%)
5 = AI5 (0-100%)
6 = AI6 (0-100%)
P3.3.5.2 When the reference is

between 0 and 0 ± this
Joystick Dead Zone 0.0 20.0 % 2.0 384
parameter, the
reference is set to 0.
The AC drive stops if

the joystick reference
stays in the sleep zone
for longer than the
sleep delay.
P3.3.5.3
0 = Not used
Joystick Sleep Zone 0.0 20.0 % 0.0 385
The Sleep function is

available only if you
use joystick to control
the frequency
reference.
The AC drive stops if

the joystick reference
stays in the sleep zone
for longer than the
P3.3.5.4 sleep delay.
Joystick Sleep Delay 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 386
The Sleep function is
available only if you
use joystick to control
the frequency
reference.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 44: Jogging parameters
Enables the Jogging

function from digital
P3.3.6.1 inputs. Does not have
DigIN an effect on the jogging
Enable DI Jogging Varies Varies 532
Slot0.1 from the fieldbus. It is
possible to enable
Jogging only when the
drive is in STOP state.
Connect to a digital
P3.3.6.2
input to activate
Jogging Reference 1 DigIN
Varies Varies 530 P3.3.6.4. If the input is
Activation Slot0.1
activated, the drive
starts.
Connect to a digital
P3.3.6.3
input to activate
Jogging Reference 2 DigIN
Varies Varies 531 P3.3.6.5. If the input is
Activation Slot0.1
starts.
P3.3.6.4 Gives the frequency

reference when
Jogging Reference 1 -MaxRef MaxRef Hz 0.00 1239
Jogging Reference 1 is
activated.
P3.3.6.5 Gives the frequency

reference when
Jogging Reference 2 -MaxRef MaxRef Hz 0.00 1240
Jogging Reference 2 is
activated.
Gives the acceleration

and deceleration times
P3.3.6.6 Jogging Ramp 0.1 300.0 s 10.0 1257
when the Jogging
function is active.

5.4 GROUP 3.4: RAMPS AND BRAKES SETUP
Table 45: Ramp 1 setup
You can make

P3.4.1.1
smoother the start and
Ramp 1 Shape 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 500 the end of the
acceleration and
deceleration ramps.
Gives the time that is

necessary for the
output frequency to
P3.4.1.2 Acceleration Time 1 0.1 300.0 s 5.0 103
increase from zero
frequency.

necessary for the
output frequency to
P3.4.1.3 Deceleration Time 1 0.1 300.0 s 5.0 104
decrease from
zero frequency.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 46: Ramp 2 setup
You can make

P3.4.2.1
smoother the start and
Ramp 2 Shape 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 501 the end of the
acceleration and
deceleration ramps.

necessary for the
output frequency to
P3.4.2.2 Acceleration Time 2 0.1 300.0 s 10.0 502
increase from zero
frequency.

necessary for the
output frequency to
P3.4.2.3 Deceleration Time 2 0.1 300.0 s 10.0 503
decrease from
zero frequency.

ramp 1 or 2.
FALSE = Ramp 1
DigIN Shape, Acceleration
P3.4.2.4 Ramp 2 Selection Varies Varies 408 Time 1 and
Slot0.1
Deceleration Time 1.
TRUE = Ramp 2 Shape,
Acceleration Time 2
and Deceleration Time
2.
Table 47: Start magnetisation parameters
Gives the DC current

that is fed into the
Start Magnetising motor at the start.
P3.4.3.1 0.00 IL A IH 517
Current
0 = Disabled
Gives the time during

Start Magnetising which the DC current is
P3.4.3.2 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 516
Time fed to the motor before
the acceleration starts.

Table 48: DC brake parameters
Gives the current that

is fed into the motor
during DC braking.
P3.4.4.1 DC Brake Current 0 IL A IH 507
0 = Disabled
Tells if the braking is

DC Braking Time at ON or OFF and gives
P3.4.4.2 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 508
Stop the braking time when
the motor stops.
Frequency to Start The output frequency

P3.4.4.3 DC Braking at Ramp 0.10 10.00 Hz 1.50 515 at which the DC
Stop braking starts.
Table 49: Flux braking parameters
P3.4.5.1
Flux Braking 0 1 0 520 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Gives the current level

P3.4.5.2 Flux Braking Current 0 IL A IH 519
for the flux braking.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.5 GROUP 3.5: I/O CONFIGURATION
Table 50: Digital input settings
Index Parameter Default ID Description
Ctrl signal 1 when the control place is

P3.5.1.1 Control Signal 1 A DigIN SlotA.1 * 403
I/O A (FWD).

P3.5.1.2 Control Signal 2 A DigIN SlotA.2 * 404
I/O A (REV).

P3.5.1.3 Control Signal 3 A DigIN Slot0.1 434
I/O A.
Start signal 1 when the control place

P3.5.1.4 Control Signal 1 B DigIN Slot0.1 * 423
is I/O B.

P3.5.1.5 Control Signal 2 B DigIN Slot0.1 * 424
is I/O B.

P3.5.1.6 Control Signal 3 B DigIN Slot0.1 435
is I/O B.
TRUE = Force the control place to I/O

P3.5.1.7 I/O B Control Force DigIN Slot0.1 * 425
B.
TRUE = I/O reference B (P3.3.1.6)

P3.5.1.8 I/O B Reference Force DigIN Slot0.1 * 343
gives the frequency reference.
P3.5.1.9 Fieldbus Control Force DigIN Slot0.1 * 411 Force the control to fieldbus.
P3.5.1.10 Keypad Control Force DigIN Slot0.1 * 410 Force the control to keypad.
P3.5.1.11 External Fault Close DigIN SlotA.3 * 405 FALSE = OK

P3.5.1.12 External Fault Open DigIN Slot0.2 406 FALSE = External fault
TRUE = OK
P3.5.1.13 Fault Reset Close DigIN SlotA.6 * 414 TRUE = Resets all active faults.
P3.5.1.14 Fault Reset Open DigIN Slot0.1 213 FALSE = Resets all active faults.
You can set the drive in Ready state,

P3.5.1.15 Run Enable DigIN Slot0.2 407
when this is ON.
P3.5.1.16 The drive can be ready, but the start

is not possible when the interlock is
Run Interlock 1 DigIN Slot0.2 1041
on (Damper interlock).

P3.5.1.17 As above.
Run Interlock 2 DigIN Slot0.2 1042
FALSE = No action.
P3.5.1.18 Motor Preheat ON DigIN Slot0.1 1044 TRUE = Uses the DC current of the
motor preheat in Stop state. Used
when the value of P3.18.1 is 2.
Switch between ramps 1 and 2.
P3.5.1.19 Ramp 2 Selection DigIN Slot0.1 * 408 FALSE = Ramp 1 Shape, Acceleration
Time 1 and Deceleration Time 1.
TRUE = Ramp 2 Shape, Acceleration
Time 2 and Deceleration Time 2.
No acceleration or deceleration is
P3.5.1.20 Acc/Dec Prohibit DigIN Slot0.1 415
possible until the contact is open.
A binary selector for preset speeds

P3.5.1.21 Preset Frequency Selection 0 DigIN SlotA.4 * 419 (0-7). See Table 41 Preset frequency
parameters.

P3.5.1.22 Preset Frequency Selection 1 DigIN SlotA.5 * 420 (0-7). See Table 41 Preset frequency
parameters.

P3.5.1.23 Preset Frequency Selection 2 DigIN Slot0.1 * 421 (0-7). See Table 41 Preset frequency
parameters.
FALSE = Not active

P3.5.1.24 Motor Potentiometer UP DigIN Slot0.1 * 418 TRUE = Active. The motor
potentiometer reference INCREASES
until the contact is open.
FALSE = Not active

TRUE = Active. The motor
P3.5.1.25 Motor Potentiometer DOWN DigIN Slot0.1 * 417
potentiometer reference
DECREASES until the contact is
open.
FALSE = Activated
P3.5.1.26 Quick Stop Activation DigIN Slot0.2 1213
To configure these functions, see
Table 67 Quick stop settings.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The rising edge starts Timer 1 that

P3.5.1.27 Timer 1 DigIN Slot0.1 447
was programmed in Group 3.12.
P3.5.1.28 Timer 2 DigIN Slot0.1 448 See above.
P3.5.1.29 Timer 3 DigIN Slot0.1 449 See above.
P3.5.1.30 PID1 Setpoint Boost DigIN Slot0.1 1046 FALSE = No boost

TRUE = Boost
P3.5.1.31 PID1 Select Setpoint DigIN Slot0.1 1047 FALSE = Setpoint 1

TRUE = Setpoint 2
FALSE = PID2 in stop mode

TRUE = PID2 regulating
P3.5.1.32 External PID Start Signal DigIN Slot0.2 1049
This parameter has no effect if the
external PID controller is not enabled
in Group 3.14.
P3.5.1.33 External PID Select Setpoint DigIN Slot0.1 1048 FALSE = Setpoint 1
TRUE = Setpoint 2
FALSE = Not active

P3.5.1.34 Motor 1 Interlock DigIN Slot0.1 426 TRUE = Active
See Table 96 Multipump parameters.
FALSE = Not active

FALSE = Not active

FALSE = Not active


FALSE = Not active

FALSE = Not active

P3.5.1.40 Reset Maintenance Counter DigIN Slot0.1 490

TRUE = Reset
Enables the Jogging function from

P3.5.1.41 Enable DI Jogging DigIN Slot0.1 532 digital inputs. Does not have an effect
on the jogging from fieldbus.
Connect to a digital input to activate

P3.3.6.4.
Jogging Reference 1
P3.5.1.42 DigIN Slot0.1 530 NOTE!
Activation
If the input is activated, the drive
starts.
Connect to a digital input to activate

P3.3.6.5.
Jogging Reference 2
P3.5.1.43 DigIN Slot0.1 531 NOTE!
Activation
starts.
Connect this input signal to the

auxiliary contact of the mechanical
P3.5.1.44 Mechanical Brake Feedback DigIN Slot0.1 1210 brake. If the contact is not closed
within the given time, the drive shows
a fault.
Activates the Fire mode if it is

enabled with a correct password.
P3.5.1.45 Fire Mode Activation OPEN DigIN Slot0.2 1596
FALSE = Fire Mode active
TRUE = No action
Activates the Fire mode if it is

enabled with a correct password.
P3.5.1.46 Fire Mode Activation CLOSE DigIN Slot0.1 1619
FALSE = No action
TRUE = Fire Mode active
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Gives a command of reverse rotation

direction during Fire mode. This
function has no effect in normal
operation.
P3.5.1.47 Fire Mode Reverse DigIN Slot0.1 1618
FALSE = Forward
TRUE = Reverse
Start the Auto-cleaning. The process

stops if the activation signal is
removed before the process is
complete.
P3.5.1.48 Auto-cleaning Activation DigIN Slot0.1 1715
NOTE!
starts.
P3.5.1.49
Parameter Set 1/2 Selection DigIN Slot0.1 496 OPEN = Parameter set 1
CLOSED = Parameter set 2
P3.5.1.50
User Defined Fault 1 OPEN = No action
DigIN Slot0.1 15523
Activation CLOSED = Fault activated
P3.5.1.51
User Defined Fault 2 OPEN = No action
DigIN Slot0.1 15524
Activation CLOSED = Fault activated
NOTE!
Your option board and board setup gives the number of available analogue inputs.
The standard I/O board has 2 analogue inputs.

Table 51: Analogue input 1 settings
Connect the AI1 signal

to the analogue input
of your choice with this
AnIN parameter.
P3.5.2.1.1 AI1 Signal Selection 377
SlotA.1 Programmable. See
9.7.1 Programming of
digital and analogue
inputs.
P3.5.2.1.2 The filter time for the

AI1 Signal Filter analogue input.
0.00 300.00 s 0.1 * 378
Time
P3.5.2.1.3
AI1 Signal Range 0 1 0* 379 0 = 0…10V / 0…20mA
1 = 2…10V / 4…20mA
P3.5.2.1.4 The custom range

minimum setting, 20%
AI1 Custom. Min -160.00 160.00 % 0.00 * 380
= 4-20 mA/2-10 V
P3.5.2.1.5 The custom range

maximum setting.
AI1 Custom. Max -160.00 160.00 % 100.00 * 381
P3.5.2.1.6
AI1 Signal Inversion 0 1 0* 387 0 = Normal
1 = Signal inverted
AnIN See P3.5.2.1.1.

SlotA.2
AI2 Signal Filter See P3.5.2.1.2.

P3.5.2.2.2 0.00 300.00 s 0.1 * 389
Time
P3.5.2.2.3 AI2 Signal Range 0 1 1* 390 See P3.5.2.1.3.
P3.5.2.2.4 AI2 Custom. Min -160.00 160.00 % 0.00 * 391 See P3.5.2.1.4.
P3.5.2.2.5 AI2 Custom. Max -160.00 160.00 % 100.00 * 392 See P3.5.2.1.5.
P3.5.2.2.6 AI2 Signal Inversion 0 1 0* 398 See P3.5.2.1.6.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


SlotD.1

P3.5.2.3.2 0.00 300.00 s 0.1 142
Time
P3.5.2.3.3 AI3 Signal Range 0 1 0 143 See P3.5.2.1.3.
P3.5.2.3.4 AI3 Custom. Min -160.00 160.00 % 0.00 144 See P3.5.2.1.4.
P3.5.2.3.5 AI3 Custom. Max -160.00 160.00 % 100.00 145 See P3.5.2.1.5.
P3.5.2.3.6 AI3 Signal Inversion 0 1 0 151 See P3.5.2.1.6.

SlotD.2

P3.5.2.4.2 0.00 300.00 s 0.1 153
Time

SlotE.1

P3.5.2.5.2 0.00 300.00 s 0.1 189
Time


SlotE.2

P3.5.2.6.2 0.00 300.00 s 0.1 200
Time
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 57: Digital output settings on standard I/O board
The function
selection for Basic
R01
0 = None
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = General fault
4 = General fault
inverted
5 = General alarm
6 = Reversed
7 = At speed
8 = Thermistor fault
9 = Motor regulator
active
10 = Start signal active
11 = Keypad control
active
12 = I/O B control
P3.5.3.2.1 activated
13 = Limit supervision
Basic RO1 Function 0 59 2* 11001 1
14 = Limit supervision
2
15 = Fire Mode active
16 = Jogging activated
17 = Preset speed
active
18 = Quick stop
activated
19 = PID in Sleep mode
20 = PID soft fill active
21 = PID feedback
supervision (limits)
22 = Ext. PID
supervision (limits)
23 = Input press.
alarm/fault
24 = Frost prot. alarm/
fault
25 = Motor 1 control

31 = Time Channel 1
32 = Time Channel 2
33 = Time Channel 3
34 = FB ControlWord
B13
35 = FB ControlWord
B14
36 = FB ControlWord
B15
37 = FB
ProcessData1.B0
38 = FB
ProcessData1.B1
39 = FB
ProcessData1.B2
40 = Maintenance
alarm
41 = Maintenance fault
42 = Mechanical brake
P3.5.3.2.1 (Open brake
command)
Basic RO1 Function 0 59 2* 11001
43 = Mech. brake
inverted
44 = Block Out.1
45 = Block Out.2
46 = Block Out.3
47 = Block Out.4
48 = Block Out.5
49 = Block Out.6
50 = Block Out.7
51 = Block Out.8
52 = Block Out.9
53 = Block Out.10
54 = Jockey pump
control
55 = Priming pump
control
56 = Auto-cleaning
active
57 = Motor Switch
Open
58 = TEST (Always
Closed)
59 = Motor preheat
active
The ON delay for the

P3.5.3.2.2 Basic R01 ON Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 11002
relay.
The OFF delay for the

P3.5.3.2.3 Basic R01 OFF Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 11003
relay.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.5.3.2.4 Basic R02 Function 0 56 3* 11004 See P3.5.3.2.1.
P3.5.3.2.5 Basic R02 ON Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 11005 See M3.5.3.2.2.
P3.5.3.2.6 Basic R02 OFF Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 11006 See M3.5.3.2.3.
See P3.5.3.2.1. Not

P3.5.3.2.7 Basic R03 Function 0 56 1* 11007 visible if only 2 output
relays are installed.
THE DIGITAL OUTPUTS OF THE EXPANDER SLOTS C, D AND E
Shows only the parameters for the outputs on option boards in slots C, D and E. Make the
selections as in Basic RO1 Function (P3.5.3.2.1).
This group or these parameters are not visible if there are no digital outputs in slots C, D or
E.

Table 58: Standard I/O board analogue output settings
0 = TEST 0% (Not used)

1 = TEST 100%
2 = Output freq (0 -
fmax)
3 = Freq reference (0 -
fmax)
4 = Motor speed (0 -
Motor nominal speed)
5 = Output current (0 -
InMotor)
6 = Motor torque (0 -
TnMotor)
7 = Motor power (0 -
PnMotor)
P3.5.4.1.1
8 = Motor voltage (0 -
AO1 function 0 31 2* 10050 UnMotor)
9 = DC link voltage (0 -
1000V)
10 = PID Setpoint
(0-100%)
11 = PID Feedback
(0-100%)
12 = PID1 output
(0-100%)
13 = Ext.PID output
(0-100%)
14 = ProcessDataIn1
(0-100%)
15 = ProcessDataIn2
(0-100%)
16 = ProcessDataIn3
(0-100%)
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

17 = ProcessDataIn4
(0-100%)
18 = ProcessDataIn5
(0-100%)
19 = ProcessDataIn6
(0-100%)
20 = ProcessDataIn7
(0-100%)
21 = ProcessDataIn8
(0-100%)
22 = Block Out.1
(0-100%)
23 = Block Out.2
P3.5.4.1.1
(0-100%)
AO1 function 0 31 2* 10050 24 = Block Out.3
(0-100%)
25 = Block Out.4
(0-100%)
26 = Block Out.5
(0-100%)
27 = Block Out.6
(0-100%)
28 = Block Out.7
(0-100%)
29 = Block Out.8
(0-100%)
30 = Block Out.9
(0-100%)
31 = Block Out.10
(0-100%)
The filter time of the

analogue output signal.
See P3.5.2.1.2.
P3.5.4.1.2 AO1 filter time 0.0 300.0 s 1.0 * 10051
0 = No filtering
0 = 0 mA / 0V
1 = 4 mA / 2V
Make the selection of

the signal type
P3.5.4.1.3 AO1 minimum 0 1 0* 10052
(current/voltage) with
the dip switches. The
analogue output
scaling is different in
P3.5.4.1.4. See also
P3.5.2.1.3.

P3.5.4.1.4 The minimum scale in

process unit. Depends
AO1 minimum scale Varies Varies Varies 0.0 * 10053
on the selection of the
AO1 function.
P3.5.4.1.5 The maximum scale in

process unit. Depends
AO1 maximum scale Varies Varies Varies 0.0 * 10054
on the selection of the
AO1 function.
THE ANALOGUE OUTPUTS OF THE EXPANDER SLOTS C, D AND E
Shows only the parameters for the outputs on option boards in slots C, D and E. Make the
selections as in Basic AO1 Function (P3.5.4.1.1).
This group or these parameters are not visible if there are no digital outputs in slots C, D or
E.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.6 GROUP 3.6: FIELDBUS DATA MAPPING
Table 59: Fieldbus data mapping

the data that is sent to
fieldbus with the ID of
the parameter or
monitor. The data is
Fieldbus Data Out 1 scaled to an unsigned
P3.6.1 0 35000 1 852
Selection 16-bit format
according to the format
on the control panel.
For example, 25.5 on
the display agrees with
255.

Fieldbus Data Out 2
P3.6.2 0 35000 2 853 the Process Data Out
Selection
with the parameter ID.

Fieldbus Data Out 3
Selection

Fieldbus Data Out 4
Selection

Fieldbus Data Out 5
Selection

Fieldbus Data Out 6
Selection

Fieldbus Data Out 7
Selection

Fieldbus Data Out 8
Selection

Table 60: The default values for Process Data Out in fieldbus
Data Default value Scale
Process Data Out 1 Output frequency 0.01 Hz
Process Data Out 2 Motor speed 1 rpm
Process Data Out 3 Motor current 0.1 A
Process Data Out 4 Motor torque 0.1%
Process Data Out 5 Motor power 0.1%
Process Data Out 6 Motor voltage 0.1 V
Process Data Out 7 DC link voltage 1V
Process Data Out 8 Last active fault code 1
For example, the value 2500 for Output frequency agrees with 25.00 Hz, because the scale is
0.01. All the monitoring values that you can find in Chapter 4.1 Monitor group are given the
scale value.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.7 GROUP 3.7: PROHIBIT FREQUENCIES
Table 61: Prohibit frequencies
P3.7.1 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
-1.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 509
Range 1 Low Limit
P3.7.2 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 510
Range 1 High Limit
P3.7.3 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 511
Range 2 Low Limit
P3.7.4 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 512
Range 2 High Limit
P3.7.5 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 513
Range 3 Low Limit
P3.7.6 0 = Not used

Prohibit Frequency
0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 514
Range 3 High Limit
P3.7.7 A multiplier of the set

ramp time between
Ramp Time Factor 0.1 10.0 Times 1.0 518
prohibit frequency
limits.

5.8 GROUP 3.8: SUPERVISIONS
Table 62: Supervision settings
0 = Output frequency
1 = Frequency reference
2 = Motor current
3 = Motor torque
4 = Motor power
5 = DC-link voltage
6 = Analogue input 1
Supervision #1 Item
P3.8.1 0 17 0 1431 8 = Analogue input 3
Selection
12 = Temperature input 1
0 = Not used
1 = Low limit supervision
P3.8.2 Supervision #1 Mode 0 2 0 1432 (output active under
limit)
2 = High limit supervision
(output active over limit)
The supervision limit for

P3.8.3 Supervision #1 Limit -50.00 50.00 Varies 25.00 1433 the set item. The unit
shows automatically.
The supervision limit

Supervision #1 Limit hysteresis for the set
P3.8.4 0.00 50.00 Varies 5.00 1434
Hysteresis item. The unit is set
automatically.
Supervision #2 Item See P3.8.1

P3.8.5 0 17 1 1435
Selection
P3.8.6 Supervision #2 Mode 0 2 0 1436 See P3.8.2
P3.8.7 Supervision #2 Limit -50.00 50.00 Varies 40.00 1437 See P3.8.3
Supervision #2 Limit See P3.8.4

P3.8.8 0.00 50.00 Varies 5.00 1438
Hysteresis
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.9 GROUP 3.9: PROTECTIONS
Table 63: General protections settings
0 = No action
P3.9.1.2 1 = Alarm
0 3 2 701
function)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
0 = 3-phase support
1 = 1-phase support
P3.9.1.3 Input Phase Fault 0 1 0 730
If you use the 1-phase
supply, the value must
be 1-phase support.
0 = Fault stored in
P3.9.1.4 Undervoltage Fault 0 1 0 727 history
1 = Fault not stored in
history
Response to Output See P3.9.1.2.

P3.9.1.5 0 3 2 702
Phase Fault
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Alarm + preset
Response to
fault frequency
Fieldbus
P3.9.1.6 0 5 3 733 (P3.9.1.12)
Communication
3 = Fault (Stop
Fault
according to stop
function)
4 = Fault (Stop by
coasting
Slot Communication See P3.9.1.2.

P3.9.1.7 0 3 2 734
Fault
P3.9.1.8 Thermistor Fault 0 3 0 732 See P3.9.1.2.
P3.9.1.9 PID Soft Fill Fault 0 3 2 748 See P3.9.1.2.
Response to PID See P3.9.1.2.

P3.9.1.10 0 3 2 749
Supervision Fault
Response to External See P3.9.1.2.

P3.9.1.11 PID Supervision 0 3 2 757
Fault

Table 63: General protections settings
See P3.9.1.2. You can

configure this fault
P3.9.1.12 Earth Fault 0 3 3 703
only in frames MR7,
MR8, and MR9.
Used when the fault

Preset Alarm response (in Group 3.9
P3.9.1.13 P3.3.1.1 P3.3.1.2 Hz 25.00 183
Frequency Protections) is Alarm +
preset frequency.
P3.9.1.14 See P3.9.1.2.

Response to Safe
Torque Off (STO) 0 3 3 775
Fault
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 64: Motor thermal protection settings
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
Motor Thermal mode)
P3.9.2.1 0 3 2 704 3 = Fault (Stop by
Protection
coasting)
If you have a motor

thermistor, use it to
protect the motor. Set
the value to be 0.
Ambient The ambient

P3.9.2.2 -20.0 100.0 °C 40.0 705
Temperature temperature in °C.
Gives the cooling factor

at zero speed in
P3.9.2.3
relation to the point
Zero Speed Cooling
5.0 150.0 % Varies 706 where the motor
Factor
operates at nominal
speed without an
external cooling.
The time constant is

P3.9.2.4
the time within which
Motor Thermal Time
1 200 min Varies 707 the calculated thermal
Constant
stage has reached 63%
of its final value.
P3.9.2.5
Motor Thermal
10 150 % 100 708
Loadability

Table 65: Motor stall protection settings
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Fault (Stop
P3.9.3.1 Motor Stall Fault 0 3 0 709
according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
P3.9.3.2 For a stall state to

occur, the current
Stall Current 0.00 5.2 A 3.7 710
must be above this
limit.
P3.9.3.3 This is the maximum

time for a stall state.
Stall Time Limit 1.00 120.00 s 15.00 711
For a stall state to

occur, the output
P3.9.3.4 Stall Frequency Limit 1.00 P3.3.1.2 Hz 25.00 712 frequency must be
below this limit for a
certain time.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 66: Motor underload protection settings
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Fault (Stop
P3.9.4.1 Underload Fault 0 3 0 713
according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
Gives the value for the

P3.9.4.2 Underload minimum torque thats
Protection: Field is possible when the
10.0 150.0 % 50.0 714
Weakening Area output frequency is
Load bigger than the field
weakening point.
Gives the value for the

minimum torque that is
possible with zero
Underload frequency. If you
P3.9.4.3 Protection: Zero 5.0 150.0 % 10.0 715 change the value of
Frequency Load parameter P3.1.1.4,
this parameter is
automatically restored
to the default value.
P3.9.4.4 This is the maximum

Underload
time for an underload
Protection: Time 2.00 600.00 s 20.00 716
state.
Limit

Table 67: Quick stop settings
How the drive stops

when the Quick stop
function is activated
from DI or fieldbus.
P3.9.5.1
Quick Stop Mode 0 2 1 1276
0 = Coasting
1 = Quick stop
deceleration time
2 = Stop according to
Stop function (P3.2.5)
P3.9.5.2 FALSE = Activated

DigIN
Quick Stop Activation Varies Varies 1213
Slot0.2
P3.9.5.3
Quick Stop
0.1 300.0 s 3.0 1256
Deceleration Time
P3.9.5.4 0 = No action
Response to Quick 1 = Alarm
0 2 1 744
Stop Fault 2 = Fault (Stop
according to Quick
stop mode)
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 68: Temperature input fault 1 settings
Selection of
signals to use for
alarm and fault
triggering.
B0 = Temperature
Signal 1
B1 = Temperature
Signal 2
B2 = Temperature
Signal 3
B3 = Temperature
Signal 4
B4 = Temperature
Temperature Signal Signal 5
P3.9.6.1 0 63 0 739
1 B5 = Temperature
Signal 6
The maximum value is

taken from the set
signals and used for
alarm and fault
triggering.
NOTE!
Only the 6 first
temperature inputs
are supported (the
boards from slot A to
slot E).
The temperature limit

for an alarm.
NOTE!
P3.9.6.2 Alarm Limit 1 -30.0 200.0 °C 120.0 741
Only the inputs that
are set with
parameter P3.9.6.1
are compared.

for an alarm.
NOTE!
P3.9.6.3 Fault Limit 1 -30.0 200.0 °C 120.0 742
are set with
parameter P3.9.6.1
are compared.

0 = No response
1 = Alarm
Fault Limit Response 2 = Fault (Stop
P3.9.6.4 0 3 2 740
1 according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

The selection of
signals to use for
alarm and fault
triggering.
B0 = Temperature
Signal 1
B1 = Temperature
Signal 2
B2 = Temperature
Signal 3
B3 = Temperature
Signal 4
B4 = Temperature
Temperature Signal Signal 5
P3.9.6.5 0 63 0 763
2 B5 = Temperature
Signal 6
The maximum value is

taken from the set
signals and used for
alarm and fault
triggering.
NOTE!
Only the 6 first
temperature inputs
are supported (the
boards from slot A to
slot E).

for an alarm.
NOTE!
P3.9.6.6 Alarm Limit 2 -30.0 200.0 °C 120.0 764
are set with
parameter P3.9.6.5
are compared.

for an alarm.
NOTE!
P3.9.6.7 Fault Limit 2 -30.0 200.0 °C 120.0 765
are set with
parameter P3.9.6.5
are compared.

0 = No response
1 = Alarm
Fault Limit Response 2 = Fault (Stop
P3.9.6.8 0 3 2 766
2 according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
Table 70: AI low protection settings
P3.9.8.1 0 = No protection
Analogue Input Low 1 = Protection enabled
0 2 767
Protection in Run state
2 = Protection enabled
in Run and Stop state
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Alarm + preset
fault frequency
P3.9.8.2
(P3.9.1.13)
Analogue Input Low
0 5 0 700 3 = Alarm + previous
Fault
frequency reference
4 = Fault (Stop
according to stop
mode)
5 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 71: User-defined fault parameters
User Defined Fault 1 DigIN OPEN = No action

P3.9.9.1 15523
Activation Slot0.1 CLOSED = Fault
activated
0 = No action
P3.9.9.2 1 = Alarm
Response to User 2 = Fault (Stop
0 3 3 15525
Defined Fault 1 according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
User Defined Fault 2 DigIN OPEN = No action

P3.9.10.1 15524
Activation Slot0.1 CLOSED = Fault
activated
P3.9.10.2 See P3.9.9.2

Response to User
0 3 3 15526
Defined Fault 2

5.10 GROUP 3.10: AUTOMATIC RESET
Table 72: Autoreset settings
P3.10.1
Automatic Reset 0 1 0 731 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

start mode for
Automatic reset.
P3.10.2 Restart Function 0 1 1 719
0 = Flying start
1 = According to
P3.2.4.
P3.10.3 The wait time before

10000.0 the first reset is done.
Wait Time 0.10 s 0.50 717
0
P3.10.4 When the trial time is

10000.0 over, and the fault is
Trial Time 0.00 s 60.00 718
0 still active, the drive
will trip.
The total quantity of

trials. The fault type
P3.10.5 does not have an effect
on it. If the drive is not
Number of Trials 1 10 4 759
able to be reset with
the quantity of trials
and the set trial time, a
fault shows.
Autoreset permitted?
Autoreset:
P3.10.6 0 1 1 720
Undervoltage 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset:
P3.10.7 0 1 1 721
Overvoltage 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset:
P3.10.8 0 1 1 722
Overcurrent 0 = No
1 = Yes
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 72: Autoreset settings
P3.10.9 Autoreset: AI Low 0 1 1 723

0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset: Unit
P3.10.10 0 1 1 724
Overtemperature 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset: Motor
P3.10.11 0 1 1 725
Overtemperature 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset: External
P3.10.12 0 1 0 726
Fault 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset:
P3.10.13 0 1 0 738
Underload Fault 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset: PID
P3.10.14 0 1 0 776
Supervision Fault 0 = No
1 = Yes
Autoreset: Ext PID
P3.10.15 0 1 0 777
Supervision Fault 0 = No
1 = Yes

5.11 GROUP 3.11: APPLICATION SETTINGS
Table 73: Application settings
The password of the

P3.11.1 Password 0 9999 0 1806
administrator.
0 = Celsius
1 = Fahrenheit
P3.11.2 C/F Selection 0 1 0* 1197 The system shows all

the temperature-
related parameters
and monitoring values
in the set unit.
0 = kW
1 = hp
P3.11.3 kW/hp Selection 0 1 0* 1198 The system shows all

the power-related
parameters and
monitoring values in
the set unit.
The division of the

display of the control
panel into sections in
the multimonitor view.
P3.11.4 Multimonitor View 0 2 1 1196
0 = 2x2 sections
1 = 3x2 sections
2 = 3x3 sections
The values that you set

with this parameter
will be available when
you push the FUNCT
button on the keypad.
FUNCT Button
P3.11.5 0 15 15 1195
Configuration
B0 = Local / Remote
B1 = Control Page
B2 = Change Direction
B3 = Quick Edit
* = The default value in the US is 1.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.12 GROUP 3.12: TIMER FUNCTIONS
Table 74: Interval 1
hh:mm: The ON time

P3.12.1.1 ON Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1464
ss
hh:mm: The OFF time

P3.12.1.2 OFF Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1465
ss
The days of the week

when a function is
active.
A checkbox
selection
P3.12.1.3 Days 1466
B0 = Sunday
B1 = Monday
B2 = Tuesday
B3 = Wednesday
B4 = Thursday
B5 = Friday
B6 = Saturday

time channel.
A checkbox
P3.12.1.4 Assign to Channel 1468 selection
B0 = Time channel 1
B1 = Time channel 2
B2 = Time channel 3
hh:mm: See Interval 1.

P3.12.2.1 ON Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1469
ss

P3.12.2.2 OFF Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1470
ss
P3.12.2.3 Days 1471 See Interval 1.
P3.12.2.4 Assign to Channel 1473 See Interval 1.


P3.12.3.1 ON Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1474
ss

P3.12.3.2 OFF Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1475
ss

P3.12.4.1 ON Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1479
ss

P3.12.4.2 OFF Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1480
ss

P3.12.5.1 ON Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1484
ss

P3.12.5.2 OFF Time 00:00:00 23:59:59 00:00:00 1485
ss
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 79: Timer 1
The time that the timer

P3.12.6.1 Duration 0 72000 s 0 1489 runs when it is
activated by DI.
The rising edge starts

DigINSlot Timer 1 that is
P3.12.6.2 Timer 1 447
0.1 programmed in Group
3.12.

time channel.
A checkbox
P3.12.6.3 Assign to Channel 1490 selection
B0 = Time channel 1
B1 = Time channel 2
B2 = Time channel 3
Table 80: Timer 2
P3.12.7.1 Duration 0 72000 s 0 1491 See Timer 1.
DigINSlot See Timer 1.

P3.12.7.2 Timer 2 448
0.1
P3.12.7.3 Assign to Channel 1492 See Timer 1.
Table 81: Timer 3
P3.12.8.1 Duration 0 72000 s 0 1493 See Timer 1.
DigINSlot See Timer 1.

P3.12.8.2 Timer 3 449
0.1
P3.12.8.3 Assign to Channel 1494 See Timer 1.

5.13 GROUP 3.13: PID CONTROLLER
Table 82: PID controller basic settings
If the value of the

parameter is set to
100%, a change of 10%
P3.13.1.1 PID Gain 0.00 1000.00 % 100.00 118 in the error value
output to change by
10%.

to 1,00 s, a change of
P3.13.1.2 PID Integration Time 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 119
output to change by
10.00%/s.

to 1,00 s, a change of
P3.13.1.3 PID Derivation Time 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 132
during 1.00 s causes
the controller output to
change by 10.00%.
Make a selection of the

Process Unit
P3.13.1.4 1 38 1 1036 unit for the actual
Selection
value.
The value in process

units at a 0% feedback
or setpoint. This
scaling is done for
monitoring purposes
P3.13.1.5 Process Unit Min Varies Varies Varies 0 1033
only. The PID
controller still uses the
percentage internally
for feedbacks and
setpoints.
P3.13.1.6 Process Unit Max Varies Varies Varies 100 1034 See above.
The quantity of
Process Unit
P3.13.1.7 0 4 2 1035 decimals of the
Decimals
process unit value.
0 = Normal (Feedback
< Setpoint -> Increase
P3.13.1.8 Error Inversion 0 1 0 340 PID output)
1 = Inverted (Feedback
< Setpoint -> Decrease
PID output )
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 82: PID controller basic settings
The dead band area

around the setpoint in
P3.13.1.9
process units. The PID
Dead Band Varies Varies Varies 0 1056 output is locked if the
feedback stays within
the dead band area for
the set time.
P3.13.1.10 If the feedback stays in

the dead band area for
Dead Band Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 1057
the set time, the output
is locked.

Table 83: Setpoint settings
P3.13.2.1 Keypad setpoint 1 Varies Varies Varies 0 167
P3.13.2.2 Keypad setpoint 2 Varies Varies Varies 0 168
Gives the rising and

falling ramp times for
the setpoint changes.
P3.13.2.3 Setpoint ramp time 0.00 300.0 s 0.00 1068 That is, the time to
change from the
minimum to the
maximum.
PID setpoint boost DigIN

P3.13.2.4 Varies Varies 1046 FALSE = No boost
activation Slot0.1
TRUE = Boost
DigIN
P3.13.2.5 PID select setpoint Varies Varies 1047 FALSE = Setpoint 1
Slot0.1
TRUE = Setpoint 2
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

0 = Not used
1 = Keypad setpoint 1
2 = Keypad setpoint 2
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI3
6 = AI4
7 = AI5
8 = AI6
9 = ProcessDataIn1
10 = ProcessDataIn2
11 = ProcessDataIn3
12 = ProcessDataIn4
13 = ProcessDataIn5
14 = ProcessDataIn6
15 = ProcessDataIn7
16 = ProcessDataIn8
17 = Temperature input
1
2
3
4
5
Setpoint source 1 22 = Temperature input
P3.13.2.6 0 32 3* 332 6
selection
23 = Block Out.1
24 = Block Out.2
25 = Block Out.3
26 = Block Out.4
27 = Block Out.5
28 = Block Out.6
29 = Block Out.7
30 = Block Out.8
31 = Block Out.9
32 = Block Out.10
The AIs and the

ProcessDataIn are
handled as percentages
(0.00-100.00%) and
scaled according to the
setpoint minimum and
maximum.
NOTE!
The ProcessDataIn
signals use 2 decimals.
If you set temperature
inputs, you must set the
maximum scaling
parameters between -50
and 200 °C.

The minimum value at

P3.13.2.7 Setpoint 1 minimum -200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1069 the analogue signal
minimum.
The maximum value at

P3.13.2.8 Setpoint 1 maximum -200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1070 the analogue signal
maximum.
It is possible to boost the

P3.13.2.9 Setpoint 1 boost -2.0 2.0 x 1.0 1071 setpoint with a digital
input.
Setpoint source 2 See P3.13.2.6.

P3.13.2.10 0 22 2 431
selection

minimum.

maximum.
P3.13.2.13 Setpoint 2 boost -2.0 2.0 x 1.0 1078 See P3.13.2.10.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 84: Feedback settings
1 = Only Source1 in use

2 = SQRT(Source1);
(Flow=Constant x
SQRT(Pressure))
3 = SQRT(Source1-
Source 2)
4 = SQRT(Source 1) +
P3.13.3.1 Feedback Function 1 9 1* 333 SQRT (Source 2)
5 = Source 1 + Source 2
6 = Source 1 - Source 2
7 = MIN (Source 1,
Source 2)
8 = MAX (Source 1,
Source 2)
9 = MEAN (Source 1,
Source 2)
Used for example with

Feedback Function
P3.13.3.2 -1000.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1058 the value 2 in Feedback
Gain
Function.

0 = Not used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = AI3
4 = AI4
5 = AI5
6 = AI6
7 = ProcessDataIn1
8 = ProcessDataIn2
9 = ProcessDataIn3
10 = ProcessDataIn4
11 = ProcessDataIn5
12 = ProcessDataIn6
13 = ProcessDataIn7
14 = ProcessDataIn8
21 = Block Out.1
22 = Block Out.2
Feedback 1 Source 23 = Block Out.3
P3.13.3.3 0 30 2* 334 24 = Block Out.4
Selection
25 = Block Out.5
26 = Block Out.6
27 = Block Out.7
28 = Block Out.8
29 = Block Out.9
30 = Block Out.10
The AIs and the

ProcessDataIn are
handled as percentage
(0.00-100.00%) and
scaled according to
Feedback minimum and
maximum.
NOTE!
The ProcessDataIn
maximum scaling
and 200 °C.

P3.13.3.4 Feedback 1 Minimum -200.00 200.00 % 0.00 336 the analogue signal
minimum.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


Feedback 1
P3.13.3.5 -200.00 200.00 % 100.00 337 the analogue signal
Maximum
maximum.
Feedback 2 Source See P3.13.3.3.

P3.13.3.6 0 20 0 335
Selection

minimum.

Feedback 2
M3.13.3.8 -200.00 200.00 % 100.00 339 the analogue signal
Maximum
maximum.
Table 85: Feedforward settings
P3.13.4.1 See P3.13.3.1

Feedforward
1 9 1 1059
Function
Feedforward See P3.13.3.2

P3.13.4.2 -1000 1000 % 100.0 1060
Function Gain
Feedforward 1 See P3.13.3.3

P3.13.4.3 0 25 0 1061
Source Selection

P3.13.4.4 -200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1062
Minimum

P3.13.4.5 -200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1063
Maximum

P3.13.4.6 0 25 0 1064
Source Selection
P3.13.4.7 Feedforward 2 Min -200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1065 See P3.13.3.7
P3.13.4.8 Feedforward 2 Max -200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1066 See M3.13.3.8

Table 86: Sleep function settings
The drive goes to sleep

P3.13.5.1 mode when the output
frequency stays below
SP1 Sleep Frequency 0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 1016
this limit for a longer
time than set by SP1
Sleep Delay.
The minimum quantity

P3.13.5.2 of time during which
the frequency has to
SP1 Sleep Delay 0 300 s 0 1017
stay below the sleep
level before the drive
stops.
Gives the level for the

P3.13.5.3
PID feedback value
SP1 Wake-up Level Varies 0.0000 1018 wake-up supervision.
Uses the set process
units.
The selection for the

P3.13.5.4 operation of P3.13.5.3.
SP1 Wake-up Mode 0 1 0 1019
0 = Absolute level
1 = Relative setpoint
P3.13.5.5 See P3.13.5.1.

SP2 Sleep Frequency 0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 1075
P3.13.5.6 See P3.13.5.2.

SP2 Sleep Delay 0 3000 s 0 1076
P3.13.5.7 See P3.13.5.3.

SP2 Wake-up Level Varies 0.0000 1077

P3.13.5.8 operation of P3.13.5.7.
SP2 Wake-up Mode 0 1 0 1020
0 = Absolute level
1 = Relative setpoint
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 87: Feedback supervision parameters
P3.13.6.1
Enable Feedback 0 = Disabled
0 1 0 735
Supervision 1 = Enabled
P3.13.6.2 The supervision of the

upper actual/process
Upper Limit Varies Varies Varies Varies 736
value.
P3.13.6.3 The supervision of the

lower actual/process
Lower Limit Varies Varies Varies Varies 758
value.
If the target value is

not reached in this
P3.13.6.4 Delay 0 30000 s 0 737
time, a fault or alarm
shows.
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
Response to PID 2 = Fault (Stop
P3.13.6.5 0 3 2 749
Supervision Fault according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

Table 88: Pressure loss compensation parameters
Enables pressure loss

compensation for the
P3.13.7.1
setpoint 1.
Enable Setpoint 1 0 1 0 1189
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The value that is added

proportionally to the
P3.13.7.2
frequency. Setpoint
Setpoint 1 Max
Varies Varies Varies Varies 1190 compensation = max
Compensation
compensation *
(FreqOut-MinFreq)/
(MaxFreq-MinFreq).
P3.13.7.3 Enable Setpoint 2 0 1 0 1191 See P3.13.7.1.
Setpoint 2 Max See P3.13.7.2.

P3.13.7.4 Varies Varies Varies Varies 1192
Compensation
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 89: Soft fill settings
P3.13.8.1
Enable Soft Fill 0 1 0 1094 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The drive accelerates

P3.13.8.2 to this frequency
before it starts to
Soft Fill Frequency 0.00 50.00 Hz 20.00 1055
control. After this, the
drive goes to normal
PID control mode.
The drive operates at

P3.13.8.3 the PID start frequency
until the feedback
Soft Fill Level Varies Varies Varies 0.0000 1095
reaches this value.
Then the controller
starts to control.

not reached in this
time, a fault or alarm
shows.
P3.13.8.4
Soft Fill Timeout 0 30000 s 0 1096 0 = No timeout
NOTE!
If you set the value to
be 0, no fault shows.
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
PID Soft Fill Timeout 2 = Fault (Stop
P3.13.8.5 0 3 2 738
Response according to stop
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)

Table 90: Input pressure supervision parameters
0 = Disabled
P3.13.9.1 Enable Supervision 0 1 0 1685 1 = Enabled
Enables the input

pressure supervision.
The source of the

signal of the input
pressure
measurement.
6 = ProcessDataIn1
(0-100%)
7 = ProcessDataIn2
(0-100%)
8 = ProcessDataIn3
(0-100%)
9 = ProcessDataIn4
P3.13.9.2 Supervision Signal 0 23 0 1686 (0-100%)
10 = ProcessDataIn5
(0-100%)
11 = ProcessDataIn6
(0-100%)
12 = ProcessDataIn7
(0-100%)
13 = ProcessDataIn8
(0-100%)
14 = Block Out.1
15 = Block Out.2
16 = Block Out.3
17 = Block Out.4
18 = Block Out.5
19 = Block Out.6
20 = Block Out.7
21 = Block Out.8
22 = Block Out.9
23 = Block Out.10

unit for the
supervision. You can
Supervision Unit
P3.13.9.3 0 8 Varies 2 1687 scale the supervision
Selection
signal (P3.13.9.2) to
process units on the
panel.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 90: Input pressure supervision parameters
Supervision Unit The selection of the

P3.13.9.4 0 4 2 1688
Decimals quantity of decimals.
Supervision Unit The signal value

Minimum Value minimum agrees to, for
example, 4mA, and the
signal value maximum
agrees to 20mA. The
Supervision Unit
P3.13.9.6 Varies Varies Varies Varies 1690 values are scaled
Maximum Value
linearly between these
2.
An alarm shows (fault

ID 1363) if the
Supervision Alarm supervision signal
Level stays below the alarm
level longer than the
time set in P3.13.9.9.
A fault shows (fault ID

1409) if the supervision
Supervision Fault signal stays below the
Level fault level longer than
the time set in
P3.13.9.9.
The delay time during

Supervision Fault which to show the
P3.13.9.9 0.00 60.00 s 5.00 1693
Delay supervision alarm or
fault.
Gives the rate of the

setpoint reduction of
PID Setpoint the PID controller
P3.13.9.10 0.0 100.0 % 10.0 1694
Reduction when the alarm for the
input pressure
supervision is active.
The monitoring value

for the set signal of the
V3.13.9.11 Input Pressure Varies Varies Varies Varies 1695 input pressure
supervision. Scaling
value as in P3.13.9.4.

Table 91: Frost protection parameters
P3.13.10.1 Frost Protection 0 1 0 1704 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
0 = Temperature Input
1 (-50..200 C)
2 (-50..200 C)
3 (-50..200 C)
4 (-50..200 C)
5 (-50..200 C)
6 (-50..200)
12 = ProcessDataIn1
(0-100%)
13 = ProcessDataIn2
P3.13.10.2 Temperature Signal 0 29 6 1705 (0-100%)
14 = ProcessDataIn3
(0-100%)
15 = ProcessDataIn4
(0-100%)
16 = ProcessDataIn5
(0-100%)
17 = ProcessDataIn6
(0-100%)
18 = ProcessDataIn7
(0-100%)
19 = ProcessDataIn8
(0-100%)
20 = Block Out.1
21 = Block Out.2
22 = Block Out.3
23 = Block Out.4
24 = Block Out.5
25 = Block Out.6
26 = Block Out.7
27 = Block Out.8
28 = Block Out.9
29 = Block Out.10
The temperature value

Temperature Signal P3.13.10. that agrees to the
P3.13.10.3 -100.0 °C/°F -50.0 (°C) 1706
Minimum 4 minimum value of the
set temperature signal.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 91: Frost protection parameters
The temperature value

Temperature Signal P3.13.10 that agrees to the
P3.13.10.4 300.0 °C/°F 200.0 (°C) 1707
Maximum .3 maximum value of the
set temperature signal.

Frost Protection P3.13.10 P3.13.10. below which the Frost
P3.13.10.5 °C/°F 5.00 1708
Temperature .3 4 protection function
activates.
The constant frequency

reference that is used
Frost Protection
P3.13.10.6 0.0 Varies Hz 10.0 1710 when the Frost
Frequency
protection function
activates.
The monitoring value

for the measured
Frost Temperature temperature signal in
V3.13.10.7 Varies Varies °C/°F 1711
Monitoring the Frost protection
function. Scaling value:
0.1.

5.14 GROUP 3.14: EXTERNAL PID CONTROLLER
Table 92: Basic settings for the external PID controller
P3.14.1.1 Enable External PID 0 1 0 1630 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
FALSE = PID2 in stop

mode
TRUE = PID2
DigIN regulating
P3.14.1.2 Start Signal 1049
Slot0.2
If the PID2 controller is
not enabled in the
Basic menu for PID2,
this parameter has no
effect.
The output value of the

PID controller as a
percentage of its
P3.14.1.3 Output in Stop 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 1100
maximum output value
when it is stopped from
a digital output.
P3.14.1.4 PID Gain 0.00 1000.00 % 100.00 1631
P3.14.1.5 PID Integration Time 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 1632
P3.14.1.6 PID Derivation Time 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 1633
Process Unit
P3.14.1.7 0 37 0 1635
Selection
P3.14.1.8 Process Unit Min Varies Varies Varies 0 1664
P3.14.1.9 Process Unit Max Varies Varies Varies 100 1665
Process Unit
P3.14.1.10 0 4 2 1666
Decimals
P3.14.1.11 Error Inversion 0 1 0 1636
P3.14.1.12 Dead Band Varies Varies Varies 0.0 1637
P3.14.1.13 Dead Band Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 1638
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 93: Setpoints of the external PID controller
P3.14.2.1 Keypad Setpoint 1 0.00 100.00 Varies 0.00 1640
P3.14.2.2 Keypad Setpoint 2 0.00 100.00 Varies 0.00 1641
P3.14.2.3 Setpoint Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1642
DigIN
P3.14.2.4 Select Setpoint Varies Varies 1048 FALSE = Setpoint 1
Slot0.1
TRUE = Setpoint 2

0 = Not Used
1 = Keypad Setpoint 1
2 = Keypad Setpoint 2
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI3
6 = AI4
7 = AI5
8 = AI6
9 =ProcessDataIn1
10 =ProcessDataIn2
11 =ProcessDataIn3
12 =ProcessDataIn4
13 =ProcessDataIn5
14 =ProcessDataIn6
15 =ProcessDataIn7
16 =ProcessDataIn8
1
2
3
4
5
Setpoint Source 1 22 = Temperature Input
P3.14.2.5 0 32 1 1643 6
Selection
23 = Block Out.1
24 = Block Out.2
25 = Block Out.3
26 = Block Out.4
27 = Block Out.5
28 = Block Out.6
29 = Block Out.7
30 = Block Out.8
31 = Block Out.9
32 = Block Out.10
The AIs and the

ProcessDataIn are
handled as percentages
(0.00- 100.00%) and
scaled according to the
maximum.
NOTE!
The ProcessDataIn
maximum scaling
and 200 °C.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


minimum.

maximum.
Setpoint source 2 See P3.14.2.5.

P3.14.2.8 0 22 0 1646
selection

minimum.

maximum.
Table 94: Feedback of the external PID controller
P3.14.3.1 Feedback Function 1 9 1 1650
Feedback Function
P3.14.3.2 -1000.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1651
Gain

P3.14.3.3 0 25 1 1652
Selection

minimum.

Feedback 1
Maximum
maximum.

P3.14.3.6 0 25 2 1655
Selection

minimum.

Feedback 2
Maximum
maximum.

Table 95: Process supervision of the external PID controller
P3.14.4.1 Enable Supervision 0 1 0 1659 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
P3.14.4.2 Upper Limit Varies Varies Varies Varies 1660
P3.14.4.3 Lower Limit Varies Varies Varies Varies 1661

not reached in this
P3.14.4.4 Delay 0 30000 s 0 1662
time, a fault or an
alarm shows.
Response to External See P3.9.1.11.

P3.14.4.5 PID Supervision 0 3 2 757
Fault
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.15 GROUP 3.15: MULTIPUMP
Table 96: Multipump parameters
The quantity of motors

(or pumps or fans) that
P3.15.1 Number of Motors 1 6 1 1001
there are in the
multipump system.
Enable or disable the

interlocks. You can use
the interlocks to tell
P3.15.2
the system if a motor is
Interlock Function 0 1 1 1032 connected.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Include the AC drive in

the autochange and
P3.15.3
interlock system.
Include FC 0 1 1 1028
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Enable or disable the

rotation of the start
P3.15.4 sequence and the
priority of motors.
Autochange 0 1 1 1027
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
When this time is over,

the autochange occurs
P3.15.5 Autochange Interval 0.0 3000.0 h 48.0 1029 if the capacity is below
the level set with
P3.15.6. and P3.15.7.
Autochange: These parameters

P3.15.6 0.00 P3.3.1.2 Hz 25.00 1031
Frequency Limit define the level below
which the capacity
Autochange: Motor must stay for the
P3.15.7 1 6 1 1030
Limit autochange to occur.

Table 96: Multipump parameters
The percentage of the

setpoint. For example,
if setpoint = 5 bar,
bandwidth = 10%.
When the feedback
P3.15.8 Bandwidth 0 100 % 10 1097
value stays between
4.5 and 5.5 bar, the
motor is not
disconnected or
removed.
If the feedback is
outside the bandwidth,
P3.15.9 Bandwidth Delay 0 3600 s 10 1098 this time must be over
before you can add or
remove pumps.
DigIN
P3.15.10 Motor 1 Interlock Varies Varies 426 FALSE = Not active
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
DigIN
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
DigIN
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
DigIN
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
DigIN
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
DigIN
Slot0.1
TRUE = Active
Overpressure See the overpressure supervision parameters below.

M3.15.16
Supervision
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 97: Overpressure supervision parameters
P3.15.16.1
Enable Overpressure 0 = Disabled
0 1 0 1698
Supervision 1 = Enabled
Supervision Alarm P3.13.1. P3.13.1. P3.13.1 Set the overpressure

P3.15.16.2 0.00 1699
Level 5 6 .4 alarm level.
5.16 GROUP 3.16: MAINTENANCE COUNTERS
Table 98: Maintenance counters
0 = Not used
P3.16.1 Counter 1 Mode 0 2 0 1104
1 = Hours
2 = Revolutions * 1000
When a maintenance
alarm shows for the
Counter 1 Alarm 2147483 counter 1.
P3.16.2 0 h/kRev 0 1105
Limit 647
0 = Not used
When a maintenance
fault shows for the
2147483 counter 1.
P3.16.3 Counter 1 Fault Limit 0 h/kRev 0 1106
647
0 = Not used
Activate to reset
B3.16.4 Counter 1 Reset 0 1 0 1107
counter 1.
P3.16.5 Counter 1 DI Reset Varies Varies 0 490 TRUE = Reset

5.17 GROUP 3.17: FIRE MODE
Table 99: Fire mode parameters
P3.17.1
Fire Mode Password 0 9999 0 1599 1002 = Enabled
1234 = Test mode
Selection of the
frequency reference
source when Fire mode
is active. This enables
the selection of for
example the AI1 or the
PID controller as the
you operate Fire Mode.
0 = Fire Mode
frequency
1 = Preset speeds
2 = Keypad
Fire Mode Frequency 3 = Fieldbus
P3.17.2 0 18 0 1617 4 = AI1
Source
5 = AI2
6 = AI1 + AI2
7 = PID1
8 = Motor
potentiometer
9 = Block Out.1
10 = Block Out.2
11 = Block Out.3
12 = Block Out.4
13 = Block Out.5
14 = Block Out.6
15 = Block Out.7
16 = Block Out.8
17 = Block Out.9
18 = Block Out.10
The frequency that is

P3.17.3 Fire Mode Frequency 8.00 P3.3.1.2 Hz 50.00 1598 used when Fire mode
is active.
P3.17.4
Fire Mode Activation DigIN FALSE = Fire Mode
1596
on OPEN Slot0.2 active
TRUE = No action
P3.17.5
Fire Mode Activation DigIN FALSE = No action
1619
on CLOSE Slot0.1 TRUE = Fire Mode
active
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 99: Fire mode parameters
The command of the

reverse rotation
direction during Fire
mode. This function
P3.17.6 has no effect in normal
DigIN operation.
Fire Mode Reverse 1618
Slot0.1
DigIN Slot0.1 =
Forward
DigIN Slot0.2 =
Reverse
A monitoring value.
See Table Table 21
Items in the monitoring
menu.
V3.17.7 Fire Mode Status 0 3 0 1597 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
2 = Activated (Enabled
+ DI Open)
3 = Test Mode
The scaling value is 1.
Shows how many times

Fire mode has been
activated in the
V3.17.8 Fire Mode Counter 1679 enabled mode. You
cannot reset this
counter. The scaling
value is 1.

5.18 GROUP 3.18: MOTOR PREHEAT PARAMETERS
Table 100: Motor preheat parameters
0 = Not used
1 = Always in stop state
2 = Controlled by DI
3 = Temperature limit
4 = Temperature limit
P3.18.1 (Measured motor
Motor Preheat temperature)
0 4 0 1225
Function
NOTE!
To set the selection 4,
you must install an
option board for
temperature
measurement.
The motor preheat

becomes active when
the heatsink
temperature or the
Preheat
P3.18.2 -20 100 °C 0 1226 measured motor
Temperature Limit
temperature goes
below this level, and
when P3.18.1 is set to 3
or 4.
The DC current for the

pre-heating of the
Motor Preheat
P3.18.3 0 31048 A Varies 1227 motor and the drive in
Current
stop state. Activated as
in P3.18.1.
FALSE = No action
TRUE = Preheat
activated in Stop state
DigIN
P3.18.4 Motor Preheat ON Varies Varies 1044 Used when P3.18.1 is
Slot0.1
set to 2. When the
value for P3.18.1 is 2,
you can also connect
time channels to this
parameter.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 100: Motor preheat parameters

temperature
measurement of the
motor.
0 = Not Used
1
2
3
Preheat Motor 4 = Temperature Input
P3.18.5 0 6 0 1045
Temperature 4
5
6
NOTE!
This parameter is not
available if there is no
option board for
temperature
measurement.

5.19 GROUP 3.20: MECHANICAL BRAKE
Table 101: Mechanical brake parameters
P3.20.1
0 = Disabled
Brake Control 0 2 0 1541 1 = Enabled
2 = Enabled with brake
status supervision
P3.20.2 The mechanical delay

Brake Mechanical that is necessary to
0.00 60.00 s 0.00 353
Delay open the brake.
P3.20.3 The frequency limit for

Brake Opening opening the
P3.20.4 P3.3.1.2 Hz 2.00 1535
Frequency Limit mechanical brake.
P3.20.4 The frequency limit for

Brake Closing closing the mechanical
P3.3.1.1 P3.3.1.2 Hz 2.00 1539
Frequency Limit brake.
P3.20.5 The mechanical brake

closes immediately if
Brake Current Limit 0.0 Varies A 0.0 1085
the motor current is
below this value.
If the correct brake

feedback signal is not
received during this
P3.20.6 Brake Fault Delay 0.00 60.00 s 2.00 352 delay, a fault shows.
This delay is only used
if the value of P3.20.1 is
set to 2.
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
Response to Brake 2 = Fault (Stop
P3.20.7 0 3 0 1316
mode)
3 = Fault (Stop by
coasting)
Connect this input

signal to the auxiliary
P3.20.8
contact of the
DigIN
Brake Feedback 1210 mechanical brake. If
Slot0.1
the contact is not
closed during the set
time, a fault shows.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

5.20 GROUP 3.21: PUMP CONTROL
Table 102: Auto-cleaning parameters
P3.21.1.1
Cleaning Function 0 1 0 1714 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The digital input signal

that starts the Auto-
cleaning sequence. The
auto-cleaning stops if
the activation signal is
P3.21.1.2
removed before the
DigIN
Cleaning Activation 1715 sequence is complete.
Slot0.1
NOTE!
If the input is
starts.
P3.21.1.3 The quantity of forward

or reverse cleaning
Cleaning Cycles 1 100 5 1716
cycles.
P3.21.1.4 The forward direction

Clean Forward frequency in the Auto-
0.00 50.00 Hz 45.00 1717
Frequency cleaning cycle.
P3.21.1.5 The operation time for

the forward direction
Clean Forward Time 0.00 320.00 s 2.00 1718
frequency in the Auto-
cleaning cycle.
P3.21.1.6 The reverse direction

Clean Reverse frequency in the Auto-
0.00 50.00 Hz 45.00 1719
Frequency cleaning cycle.
P3.21.1.7 The operation time for

reverse direction
Clean Reverse Time 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 1720
frequency in the Auto-
cleaning cycle.
P3.21.1.8 The motor acceleration

Cleaning time when the Auto-
0.1 300.0 s 0.1 1721
Acceleration Time cleaning is active.

Table 102: Auto-cleaning parameters
P3.21.1.9 The motor deceleration

Cleaning time when the Auto-
0.1 300.0 s 0.1 1722
Deceleration Time cleaning is active.
Table 103: Jockey pump parameters
0 = Not used
1 = PID sleep: the
jockey pump runs
P3.21.2.1
continuously when PID
Jockey Function 0 2 0 1674 sleep is active.
2 = PID sleep (level):
the jockey pump starts
at predefined levels
when PID sleep is
active.
The jockey pump starts

when PID Sleep is
active and the PID
feedback signal goes
below the level set in
this parameter.
P3.21.2.2 Jockey Start Level 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 1675
NOTE!
This parameter is
used only if P3.21.2.1
= 2 PID sleep (level).
The jockey pump stops

when PID Sleep is
active and the PID
feedback signal goes
above the level set in
this parameter, or
when the PID
P3.21.2.3 Jockey Stop Level 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 1676 controller wakes up
from sleep mode.
NOTE!
This parameter is
used only if P3.21.2.1
= 2 PID sleep level.
5 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 104: Priming pump parameters
P3.21.3.1
Priming Function 0 1 0 1677 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P3.21.3.2 Gives the time to start

the priming pump
Priming Time 0.0 320.00 3.0 1678
before the main pump
starts.

VACON · 204 DIAGNOSTICS MENU
6 DIAGNOSTICS MENU
6.1 ACTIVE FAULTS
When there is a fault or many faults, the display shows the name of the fault and blinks. Push
OK to go back to the Diagnostics menu. The submenu Active faults shows the number of
faults. To see the fault-time data, make a selection of a fault and push OK.
The fault stays active until you reset it. There are 4 ways to reset a fault.
• Push the Reset button for 2 s.

• Go into the submenu Reset faults and use the parameter Reset Faults.
• Give a reset signal in the I/O terminal.
• Give a reset signal with the fieldbus.
The Active faults submenu can keep a storage of maximum 10 faults. The submenu shows
the faults in the sequence in which they occurred.
6.2 RESET FAULTS

In this menu, you can reset faults. See instructions in Chapter 10.1 A fault comes into view.
CAUTION!
Before you reset the fault, remove the external Control signal to prevent that you
restart the drive.
6.3 FAULT HISTORY

You can see 40 faults in the Fault history.
To see the details of a fault, go into Fault history, find the fault and push OK.
6.4 TOTAL COUNTERS

If you read a counter value through fieldbus, see Chapter 9.19 Total and trip counters.
6 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

DIAGNOSTICS MENU VACON · 205
Table 105: The total counter parameters in the diagnostics menu
The quantity of energy

taken from the supply
network. You cannot
reset the counter. In
the text display: the
V4.4.1 Energy Counter Varies 2291 highest energy unit
that the display shows
is MW. If the counted
energy becomes more
than 999.9 MW, no unit
shows on the display.
Operating Time ad The operating time of

V4.4.3 2298
(graphical keypad) hh:min the control unit.
The operating time of

Operating Time (text
V4.4.4 a the control unit in total
keypad)
years.

Operating Time (text
V4.4.5 d the control unit in total
keypad)
days.

Operating Time (text hh:min: the control unit in
V4.4.6
keypad) ss hours, minutes and
seconds.
Run Time (graphical ad The motor run time.

V4.4.7 2293
keypad) hh:min
Run Time (text The motor run time in

V4.4.8 a
keypad) total years.
Run Time (text The motor run time in

V4.4.9 d
keypad) total days.
The motor run time in

Run Time (text hh:min:
V4.4.10 hours, minutes and
keypad) ss
seconds.
The quantity of time

that the power unit has
Power On Time ad
V4.4.11 2294 been powered on. You
(graphical keypad) hh:min
cannot reset the
counter.
Power On Time (text The power on time in

V4.4.12 a
Power On Time (text The power on time in

V4.4.13 d
keypad) total days.

VACON · 206 DIAGNOSTICS MENU
Table 105: The total counter parameters in the diagnostics menu
The power on time in

Power On Time (text hh:min:
V4.4.14 hours, minutes and
keypad) ss
seconds.
The number of times

Start Command
V4.4.15 2295 that the power unit has
Counter
been started.
6.5 TRIP COUNTERS

If you read a counter value through fieldbus, see Chapter 9.19 Total and trip counters.
Table 106: The trip counter parameters in the diagnostics menu
You can reset this

counter. In the text
display: the highest
energy unit that the
display shows is MW. If
the counted energy
becomes more than
999.9 MW, no unit
shows on the display.
P4.5.1 Energy Trip Counter Varies 2296 Resetting the

counter
• In the text display:
Push the OK
button for 4 s.
• In the graphical
display: Push OK.
A Reset counter
page shows. Push
OK again.
You can reset this

Operating Time ad counter. See
P4.5.3 2299
(graphical keypad) hh:min instructions in P4.5.1
above.
Operating Time (text The operating time in

P4.5.4 a
Operating Time (text The operating time in

P4.5.5 d
keypad) total days.
The operating time in

Operating Time (text hh:min:
P4.5.6 hours, minutes and
keypad) ss
seconds.
6 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

DIAGNOSTICS MENU VACON · 207
6.6 SOFTWARE INFO
Table 107: The software info parameters in the diagnostics menu
Software Package The code for the

V4.6.1
(graphical keypad) software identification
Software Package ID
V4.6.2
(text keypad)
Software Package
V4.6.3
Version (text keypad)
The load on the control

V4.6.4 System Load 0 100 % 2300
unit CPU
Application Name The name of the

V4.6.5
(graphical keypad) application
The code of the

V4.6.6 Application ID
application
V4.6.7 Application Version

VACON · 208 I/O AND HARDWARE MENU
7 I/O AND HARDWARE MENU

In this menu, there are different settings that are related to the options. The values in this
menu are raw values, that is, they are not scaled by the application.
7.1 BASIC I/O

In the Basic I/O menu, you can monitor the statuses of the inputs and the outputs.
7 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

I/O AND HARDWARE MENU VACON · 209
Table 108: The basic I/O parameters in the I/O and Hardware menu
Status of the digital

V5.1.1 Digital Input 1 0 1 0
input signal

input signal

input signal

input signal

input signal

input signal
Shows the mode that is

set for the analogue
input signal. The
selection is made with
Analogue Input 1 a DIP switch on the
V5.1.7 1 3 3
Mode control board.
1 = 0...20mA
3 = 0...10V
Status of the analogue

V5.1.8 Analogue Input 1 0 100 % 0.00
input signal

input signal. The
Analogue Input 2 a DIP switch on the
V5.1.9 1 3 3
Mode control board.
1 = 0...20mA
3 = 0...10V

V5.1.10 Analogue Input 2 0 100 % 0.00
input signal

Table 108: The basic I/O parameters in the I/O and Hardware menu

input signal. The
Analogue Output 1 a DIP switch on the
V5.1.11 1 3 1
Mode control board.
1 = 0...20mA
3 = 0...10V

V5.1.12 Analogue Output 1 0 100 % 0.00
output signal
Status of the relay

V5.1.13 Relay Output 1 0 1 0
output signal
Status of the relay

output signal
Status of the relay

output signal
7.2 OPTION BOARD SLOTS

The parameters in this menu are different for all the option boards. You see the parameters
of the option board that you installed. If there is no option board in the slots C, D or E, you do
not see parameters. See more about the location of the slots in Chapter 9.7.1 Programming
of digital and analogue inputs.
When you remove an option board, the fault code 39 and the fault name Device removed show
on the display. See Chapter 10.3 Fault codes.
Table 109: Option board related parameters
Menu Function Description
Settings The settings that are related to the option board

Slot C
Monitoring Monitor the data that is related to the option board

Slot D

Slot E
7 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

7.3 REAL TIME CLOCK
Table 110: The real time clock parameters in the I/O and Hardware menu
Status of the battery.
V5.5.1 Battery State 1 3 2 2205 1 = Not installed

2 = Installed
3 = Replace the battery
hh:mm: The current time of the

P5.5.2 Time 2201
ss day
P5.5.3 Date dd.mm. 2202 The current date
P5.5.4 Year yyyy 2203 The current year
The daylight saving

rule
1 = Off
2 = EU: starts on the
last Sunday in March,
P5.5.5 Daylight Saving 1 4 1 2204 ends on the last
Sunday in October
3 = US: starts on the
2nd Sunday in March,
ends on the 1st Sunday
in November
4 = Russia (permanent)
7.4 POWER UNIT SETTINGS

In this menu, you can change the settings of the fan, the brake chopper and the sine filter.
The fan operates in the optimised or the always on mode. In the optimised mode, the internal
logic of the drive receives data about the temperature and controls the fan speed. After the
drive goes in the Ready state, the fan stops in 5 minutes. In the always on mode, the fan
operates in full speed, and does not stop.
The Sine filter keeps the overmodulation depth in limits and does not let the thermal
management functions decrease the switching frequency.

Table 111: Power unit settings
P5.6.1.1 Fan Control Mode 0 1 1 2377 0 = Always on

1 = Optimised
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled (Run)
P5.6.2.1 Brake Chopper Mode 0 3 0 2 = Enabled (Run &
Stop)
3 = Enabled (Run, no
testing)
P5.6.4.1 Sine Filter 0 1 0 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled
7 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

7.5 KEYPAD
Table 112: The keypad parameters in the I/O and Hardware menu
The time after which

the display goes back
to the page that is set
P5.7.1 Timeout Time 0 60 min 0 with parameter P5.7.2.
0 = Not used
The page that the

display shows when
the drive is powered
up, or when the time
that is set with P5.7.1
is expired. If the value
is set to 0, the display
shows the last page
P5.7.2 Default Page 0 4 0
that it showed.
0 = None
1 = A menu index
2 = Main menu
3 = Control page
4 = Multimonitor
Set a page to be the

P5.7.3 Menu Index menu index. (The
selection 1 in P5.7.2.)
Set the contrast of the

P5.7.4 Contrast * 30 70 % 50
display.
Set the time after

which the backlight of
the display turns off. If
P5.7.5 Backlight Time 0 60 min 5
the value is set to 0,
the backlight is always
on.
* Only available with the graphical keypad.
7.6 FIELDBUS
In the I/O and Hardware menu, there are the parameters that are related to fieldbus boards.
You can find the instructions on how to use these parameters in the related fieldbus manual.

Submenu Submenu level 2 Submenu level 3 Submenu level 4

level 1
RS-485 Common settings Protocol Modbus RTU
N2
Bacnet MSTP
RS-485 Modbus RTU Parameters Slave address
Baud rate
Parity type
Stop bits
Communication timeout
Operate mode
Monitoring Fieldbus protocol status
Communication status
Illegal functions
Illegal data addresses
Illegal data values
Slave device busy
Memory parity error
Slave device failure
Last fault response
Control Word
Status Word
7 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


level 1
RS-485 N2 Parameters Slave address
Invalid data
Invalid commands
Command not accepted
Control word
Status word
RS-485 Bacnet MSTP Parameters Baud rate
Autobauding
MAC address
Instance number
Actual instance number
Fault code
Control word
Status word
Ethernet Common settings IP address mode
Fixed IP IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
MAC address


level 1
Ethernet Modbus TCP Parameters Connection limit
Unit Identifier number
Illegal functions
Illegal data addresses
Illegal data values
Slave device busy
Memory parity error
Slave device failure
Last fault response
Control word
Status word
Ethernet Bacnet IP Parameters Instance number
Protocol in use
BBMD IP
BBMD Port
Time to live
Actual instance number
Control word
Status word
7 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205


level 1
Ethernet Ethernet/ IP Parameters Protocol in use
Output Instance
Input Instance
Communication Timeout
Monitoring Reset Counters
Open Request
Open Format Reject
Open Resource Rejects
Open Other Rejects
Close Requests
Close Format Rejects
Close Other Rejects
Connection Timeouts
Communication Status
Control Word
Status Word
Fieldbus Protocol Status
Ethernet Profinet IO Parameters Protocol in use
Monitoring FB Protocol Status
Comm. Status
Setpoint Telegram
Actual Value Telegram
Number of Process Data
Control Word
Status Word
Connection Timeouts
Parameter accesses

VACON · 218 USER SETTINGS, FAVOURITES AND USER LEVEL MENUS
8 USER SETTINGS, FAVOURITES AND USER LEVEL

MENUS
8.1 USER SETTINGS
Table 113: General settings in the user settings menu
The selection is
P6.1 Language selection Varies Varies Varies 802 different in all the
language packages
See Table 8.1.1

M6.5 Parameter backup
Parameter backup.
M6.6 Parameter compare
Give a name to the

P6.7 Drive name drive if you think that it
is necessary.
8 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

USER SETTINGS, FAVOURITES AND USER LEVEL MENUS VACON · 219
8.1.1 PARAMETER BACKUP
Table 114: The parameter backup parameters in the user settings menu
Restores the default

Restore Factory parameter values and
P6.5.1 831
Defaults starts the Startup
wizard.
Saves the parameter

values to the control
panel, for example to
copy them to another
P6.5.2 Save to Keypad * 0 1 0 drive.
0 = No
1 = Yes
Loads the parameter

Restore from Keypad
P6.5.3 values from the control
*
panel to the drive.
Keeps a customised
parameter set (that is,
B6.5.4 Save to Set 1 all the parameters
included in the
application).
Loads the customised

B6.5.5 Restore from Set 1 parameter set to the
drive.
Keeps another
customised parameter
B6.5.6 Save to Set 2 set (that is, all the
parameters included in
the application).
Loads the customised

B6.5.7 Restore from Set 2 parameter set 2 to the
drive.
* Only available with the graphical display.
8.2 FAVOURITES
NOTE!
This menu is not available in the text display.

If you use the same items frequently, you can add them into Favourites. You can collect a set
of parameters or monitoring signals from all the keypad menus. It is not necessary to find

them in the menu structure one by one. As an alternative, add them into the Favourites
folder where it is easy to find them.
ADDING AN ITEM TO THE FAVOURITES
1 Find the item that you want to add to Favourites.

Push the OK button. STOP READY I/O
Basic Settings
Motor Nom Voltg

230.00 V
Motor Nom Freq
50.00 Hz
Motor Nom Speed
1430 rpm
2 Make a selection of Add to favourites and push the

OK button. STOP READY I/O
Motor Nom Freq
Edit
Help
Add to favourites
3 The steps are now completed. To continue, read the

instructions on the display. STOP READY I/O
Motor Nom Freq
was added to
favourites. Press OK
to continue.
REMOVING AN ITEM FROM THE FAVOURITES
1 Go to the Favourites.
8 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

2 Find the item that you want to remove. Push the OK

Favourites
Motor Nom Freq

50.00 Hz
3 Make a selection of Rem from favourites.

STOP READY I/O
Motor Nom Freq
Monitor
Help
Rem from favourites
4 To remove the item, push the OK button again.
8.3 USER LEVELS

Use the User level parameters to keep the personnel who are not approved from making
changes in the parameters. You can also prevent accidental changes in the parameters.
When you make a selection of a user level, the user cannot see all the parameters on the
display of the control panel.

Table 115: The user level parameters
1 = Normal. All the

menus are visible in
the main menu.
2 = Monitoring. Only
the monitoring and
P8.1 User Level 1 3 1 1194 user level menus are
visible in the main
menu.
3 = Favourites. Only
the favourites and user
level menus are visible
in the main menu.
If you set the value to

be to other than 0
before you go to
Monitoring from, for
example, Normal, you
have to give the access
P8.2 Access Code 0 99999 0 2362 code when you go back
to Normal. This
prevents personnel
who are not approved
from making changes
in the parameters on
the control panel.
CAUTION!
Do not lose the access code. If the access code is lost, contact your nearest service
center or partner.
CHANGING THE ACCESS CODE OF THE USER LEVELS
1 Go to the User levels.

2 Go to the item Access code and push the arrow
button Right. STOP READY ALARM Keypad
Main Menu
ID:2362 P8.2
User level
Normal
Access code
00000
8 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

3 To change the digits of the access code, use all the

arrow buttons. STOP READY ALARM I/O
Access code
ID:2362 P8.2
00000
Min:0
Max:9
4 Accept the change with the OK button.

VACON · 224 PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
9 PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
In this chapter, you can find data on the most special parameters of the application. For most
parameters of the Vacon 100 application, a basic description is sufficient. You can find these
basic descriptions in the parameter tables of Chapter 5 Parameters menu. If other data is
necessary, your distributor will help you.
P1.2 APPLICATION (ID212)
In P1.2 you can make a selection of an application that is best for your process. The
applications include preset application configurations, that is, sets of predefined parameters.
The selection of the application makes the commissioning of the drive easy and reduces the
manual work with the parameters.
These configurations are loaded to the drive when the value of parameter P1.2 Application
changes. You can change the value of this parameter when you make the start up or the
commissioning of the drive.
If you use the control panel to change this parameter, an application wizard starts and helps
you to set the basic parameters related to the application. The wizard does not start, if you
use the PC tool to change this parameter. You can find data about the application wizards in
Chapter 2 Wizards.
These applications are available:
0 = Standard
1 = Local/Remote
2 = Multi-step speed
3 = PID control
4 = Multi-purpose
5 = Motor potentiometer
NOTE!
When you change the application, the contents of the Quick Setup menu change.
9.1 MOTOR SETTINGS
P3.1.1.2 MOTOR NOMINAL FREQUENCY (ID 111)
When this parameter changes, parameters P3.1.4.2 Field Weakening Point Frequency and
P3.1.4.3 Voltage at Field Weakening Point start automatically. The 2 parameters have
different values for each motor type. See the tables in P3.1.2.2 Motor Type (ID 650).
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS VACON · 225
P3.1.2.1 CONTROL MODE (ID 600)
Selection
Selection name Description
number
The frequency reference of the drive is set to the output

0 Frequency control (open loop) frequency without slip compensation. The actual speed of the
motor is specified by the motor load.
The frequency reference of the drive is set to the motor

Speed control (sensorless
1 speed reference. The motor load does not have an effect on
control)
the motor speed. There is slip compensation.
The motor torque is controlled. The motor produces torque

in the set speed limits to achieve torque reference. P3.3.2.7
2 Torque control (open loop)
(Torque Control Frequency Limit) controls the motor speed
limit.
P3.1.2.2 MOTOR TYPE (ID 650)
In this parameter, you can set the type of motor in your process.
Selection
number
0 Induction motor (IM) Make this selection if you use an induction motor.
1 Permanent Magnet Motor (PM) Make this selection if you use a permanent magnet motor.
When this parameter changes, parameters P3.1.4.2 and P3.1.4.3 start automatically. The 2
parameters have different values for each motor type.
Parameter Induction motor (IM) Permanent magnet motor (PM)
P3.1.4.2 (Field Weakening Point Internally calculated

Motor nominal frequency
Frequency)
P3.1.4.3 (Voltage at Field Internally calculated

100.0%
Weakening Point)
P3.1.2.4 IDENTIFICATION (ID 631)
The identification run calculates or measures the motor parameters that are necessary for a
good control of the motor and speed.
The identification run helps you to adjust the motor-specific and the drive-specific
parameters. It is a tool for the commissioning and the servicing of the drive. The goal is to
find the parameter values that are optimal for the operation of the drive.
NOTE!
Before you do the identification run, you have to set the motor nameplate
parameters.

Selection
number
0 No action No identification requested.
The drive operates without speed when you do the

identification run for the motor parameters. The motor
1 Identification at standstill
receives current and voltage, but the frequency is zero. The
U/f ratio and start magnetisation parameters are identified.
The drive operates with speed when you do the identification

run for the motor parameters. The U/f ratio, the
magnetisation current and start magnetisation parameters
Identification with motor are identified.
2
rotating
To get accurate results, do this identification run with no

load on the motor shaft.
To activate the Identification function, set the parameter P3.1.2.4 and give a start command.
You have to give the start command in 20 s. If there is no start command in that time, the
identification run does not start. The parameter P3.1.2.4 is reset to the default value and an
identification alarm shows.
To stop the identification run before it is completed, give a stop command. This resets the
parameter to the default value. If the identification run is not completed, an identification
alarm shows.
NOTE!
To start the drive after the identification, a new start command is necessary.
P3.1.2.6 MOTOR SWITCH (ID 653)
You can use this parameter if there is a switch between the drive and the motor in your
system. The operation of a motor switch makes sure that an electrical circuit is de-energized
from the motor during the servicing.
When you enable this parameter, the motor switch opens and disconnects the motor from
the drive. This does not cause the drive to trip. It is not necessary to change the run
command or the reference signal to the drive.
When the servicing is done, disable the parameter P3.1.2.6 to connect the motor again. The
drive operates the motor speed to agree with the reference speed of the process commands.
If the motor rotates when you connect it, the drive finds the speed of the motor with the
Flying start function. Then the drive increases the speed to agree with the process
commands.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Mains
01
Fig. 20: The motor switch between the drive and the motor
A. The motor switch B. Mains
P3.1.2.7 LOAD DROOPING (ID 620)
The Load drooping function enables a speed drop. This parameter sets the drooping in
percentage of the nominal torque of the motor.
You can use this function when a balanced load is necessary for mechanically connected
motors. This is called static drooping. You can also use the function when a dynamic
drooping is necessary because the load changes. In static drooping, the Load Drooping Time
is set to 0, so that the drooping cannot decay. In dynamic drooping, the Load Drooping Time
is set. The load is momentarily drooped with energy from the system inertia. This decreases
the current torque spikes when the load changes suddenly.
If the motor has a nominal frequency of 50 Hz, the motor is loaded with the nominal load
(100% of the torque), and Load Drooping is set to 10%, the output frequency is let to decrease
5 Hz from the frequency reference.
Load Drooping Time

(ID656)
Output Frequency
Torque
Fig. 21: The Load drooping function

P3.1.2.10 OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL (ID 607)
See the description in P3.1.2.11 Undervoltage Control.
P3.1.2.11 UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROL (ID 608)
When you enable P3.1.2.10 or P3.1.2.11, the controllers start to monitor the changes in the
supply voltage. The controllers change the output frequency if it becomes too high or too low.
To stop the operation of the undervoltage and the overvoltage controllers, disable these 2
parameters. This is useful if the supply voltage changes more than -15% to +10%, and if the
application does not tolerate the operation of the controllers.
P3.1.2.13 STATOR VOLTAGE ADJUST (ID 659)
NOTE!
The identification run sets a value for this parameter automatically. We

recommend that you make the identification run, if it is possible. You can make the
identification run with the parameter P3.1.2.4.
It is possible to use this parameter only when the parameter P3.1.2.2 Motor Type has the
value PM motor. If you set induction motor as the motor type, the value is automatically set to
100%, and you cannot change the value.
When you change the value of P3.1.2.2 (Motor type) to PM Motor, the parameters P3.1.4.2
(Field Weakening Point Frequency) and P3.1.4.3 (Voltage at Field Weakening Point) will
increase automatically to be equal with output voltage of the drive. The set U/f ratio does not
change. This is done to prevent the operation of the PM motor in the field weakening area.
The nominal voltage of the PM motor is much lower than the full output voltage of the drive.
The nominal voltage of the PM motor agrees to the back-EMF voltage of the motor at
nominal frequency. But in a different motor manufacturer, it can be equal to, for example,
the stator voltage at nominal load.
Stator Voltage Adjust helps you to adjust the U/f curve of the drive near the back-EMF curve.
It is not necessary to change the values of many U/f curve parameters.
The parameter P3.1.2.13 gives the output voltage of the drive in percentage of the nominal
voltage of the motor at the nominal frequency of the motor. Adjust the U/f curve of the drive
above the back-EMF curve of the motor. The motor current increases the more the U/f curve
is different from the back-EMF curve.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

U [V]
MF
Stator Voltage Adjust c k-E
ba
Field Weakening (50..200%)
Point Voltage
0%
20
0%
10
Motor Nominal
Voltage
50%
Zero Frequency
Voltage f [Hz]
Motor Nominal Field

Frequency Weakening
Point
Fig. 22: The stator voltage adjustment
P3.1.2.14 OVERMODULATION (ID 1515)
Overmodulation maximises the output voltage of the drive, but increases the motor current
harmonics.
P3.1.3.1 MOTOR CURRENT LIMIT (ID 107)
This parameter tells the maximum motor current from the AC drive. The range of values for
the parameter is different for each frame size of the drive.
When the current limit is active, the drive output frequency is decreases.
NOTE!
The Motor Current Limit is not an overcurrent trip limit.

P3.1.4.1 U/F RATIO (ID 108)
Selection
number
The voltage of the motor changes linearly as a function of the

output frequency. The voltage changes from the value of
P3.1.4.6 (Zero Frequency Voltage) to the value of P3.1.4.3
0 Linear
(Voltage at Field Weakening Point) at at a frequency set in
P3.1.4.2 (Field Weakening Point Frequency). Use this default
setting if a different setting is not necessary.
The voltage of the motor changes from the value of P3.1.4.6

(Zero Frequency Voltage) to the value of P3.1.4.2 (Field
Weakening Point Frequency) at a squared curve. The motor
operates undermagnetised below the field weakening point
1 Squared
and produces less torque. You can use the squared U/f ratio
in applications where the torque demand is in relation to the
square of the speed, for example in centrifugal fans and
pumps.
It is possible to program the U/f curve with 3 different points:

the zero frequency voltage (P1), the midpoint voltage/
frequency (P2), and the field weakening point (P3). You can
2 Programmable
use the programmable U/f curve at low frequencies if it is
necessary to have more torque. You can find the optimal
settings automatically with an identification run (P3.1.2.4).
U[V]
Un
ID603
Default: Nominal Field
voltage of the motor weakening
point
Linear
Squared Default:
Nominal frequency
of the motor
f[Hz]
ID602
Fig. 23: Linear and squared change of the motor voltage
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

U[V]
P3
Un
ID603 Default: Nominal Field weakening point
voltage of the motor
ID605
P2
Default: Nominal
ID606 P1 frequency of the motor
f[Hz]
ID604 ID602
Fig. 24: The programmable U/f curve
When the parameter Motor Type has the value PM motor (Permanent Magnet Motor), this
parameter is automatically set to the value Linear.
When the parameter Motor Type has the value Induction Motor, and when this parameter is
changed, these parameters are set to their default values.
• P3.1.4.2 Field Weakening Point Frequency
• P3.1.4.3 Voltage at Field Weakening Point
• P3.1.4.4 U/f Midpoint Frequency
• P3.1.4.5 U/f Midpoint Voltage
• P3.1.4.6 Zero Frequency Voltage
P3.1.4.3 VOLTAGE AT FIELD WEAKENING POINT (ID 603)
Above the frequency at the field weakening point, the output voltage stays at the set
maximum value. Below the frequency at the field weakening point, the U/f curve parameters
control the output voltage. See the U/f parameters P3.1.4.1, P3.1.4.4 and P3.1.4.5.
When you set the parameters P3.1.1.1 (Motor nominal voltage) and P3.1.1.2 (Motor nominal
frequency), the parameters P3.1.4.2 and P3.1.4.3 automatically receive related values. To
have different values for P3.1.4.2 and P3.1.4.3, change these parameters only after you set
the parameters P3.1.1.1 and P3.1.1.2.
P3.1.4.7 FLYING START OPTIONS (ID 1590)
The parameter Flying Start Options has a checkbox selection of values.
The bits can receive these values.

• Search the shaft frequency only from the same direction as the frequency reference
• Disable the AC scanning
• Use the frequency reference for an initial guess
• Disable the DC pulses

The bit B0 controls the search direction. When you set the bit to 0, the shaft frequency is
searched in 2 directions, the positive and the negative. When you set the bit to 1, the shaft
frequency is searched only in the frequency reference direction. This prevents the shaft
movements for the other direction.
The bit B1 controls the AC scanning that premagnetises the motor. In the AC scanning, the
system sweeps the frequency from the maximum towards zero frequency. The AC scanning
stops when an adaptation to the shaft frequency occurs. To disable the AC scanning, set the
bit B1 to 1. If the value of Motor Type is permanent magnet motor, the AC scanning is
disabled automatically.
With the bit B5 you can disable the DC pulses. The primary function of the DC pulses is to
premagnetise the motor and examine the rotation of the motor. If the DC pulses and the AC
scanning are enabled, the slip frequency tells which procedure is applied. If the slip
frequency is less than 2 Hz, or the motor type is PM motor, the DC pulses are disabled
automatically.
P3.1.4.9 AUTOMATIC TORQUE BOOST (ID 109)
Use this parameter with a process that has a high starting torque because of friction.
The voltage to the motor changes in relation to the necessary torque. This makes the motor
give more torque at the start and when the motor operates at low frequencies.
The torque boost has an effect with a linear U/f curve. You can get the best result when you
have done the identification run and activated the programmable U/f curve.
9.1.1 I/F START FUNCTION

When you have a PM motor, use the I/f Start function to start the motor with constant current
control. You can receive the best effect with a high power motor. With a high power motor,
the resistance is low and it is not easy to change the U/f curve.
The I/f Start function can also give a sufficient torque for the motor at startup.
Output Frequency
I/f Start Current
Motor Current
I/f Start
Time [s]
Frequency
Fig. 25: The I/f start parameters
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.1.4.12.1 I/F START (ID 534)
When you activate the I/f Start function, the drive starts to operate in the current control
mode. A constant current is led to the motor until the output frequency increases above the
level that is set in P3.1.4.12.2. When the output frequency increases above I/f Start
Frequency level, the operation mode changes back to the normal U/f control mode.
P3.1.4.12.2 I/F START FREQUENCY (ID 535)
When the output frequency of the drive is below the limit of this parameter, I/f Start function
activates. When the output frequency is more than the limit, the drive operation mode
changes back to the normal U/f control mode.
P3.1.4.12.3 I/F START CURRENT (ID 536)
With this parameter, you can set the current that is used when the I/f Start function is
enabled.
9.1.2 TORQUE STABILATOR FUNCTION
P3.1.4.13.1 TORQUE STABILATOR GAIN (ID 1412)
P3.1.4.13.2 TORQUE STABILATOR GAIN AT FIELD WEAKENING POINT (ID 1414)
The torque stabiliser stabilises the possible oscillations in the estimated torque.
Two gains are used. TorqStabGainFWP is a constant gain at all the output frequencies.
TorqStabGain changes linearly between the zero frequency and the field weakening point
frequency. The full gain is at 0 Hz and the gain is zero at the field weakening point. The figure
shows the gains as a function of output frequency.
Gain
Effective gain
P TorqStabGainFWP
P TorqStabGain
FreqOut
P FieldWeakeningPoint
Fig. 26: The torque stabilator gain
P3.1.4.13.3 TORQUE STABILATOR DAMPING TIME CONSTANT (ID 1413)
The damping time constant of the torque stabiliser.

P3.1.4.13.4 TORQUE STABILATOR DAMPING TIME CONSTANT FOR PMM (ID 1735)
The damping time constant of the torque stabiliser for PM motors (Permanent Magnet
motors).
9.2 START/STOP SETUP

You must give the start and stop commands differently in each control place.
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (I/O A)
Use the parameters P3.5.1.1 (Control signal 1 A), P3.5.1.2 (Control signal 2 A) and P3.5.1.3
(Control signal 3 A) to make a selection of digital inputs. These digital inputs control the
start, stop and reverse commands. Then make a selection of a logic for these inputs with
P3.2.6 I/O A Logic.
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (I/O B)
Use the parameters P3.5.1.4 (Control signal 1 B), P3.5.1.5 (Control signal 2 B) and P3.5.1.6
(Control signal 3 B) to make a selection of digital inputs. These digital inputs control the
start, stop and reverse commands. Then make a selection of a logic for these inputs with
P3.2.7 I/O B Logic.
LOCAL CONTROL PLACE (KEYPAD)
The start and stop commands come from the keypad buttons. The direction of the rotation is
set with parameter P3.3.1.9 Keypad direction.
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (FIELDBUS)
Start, stop and reverse commands come from the fieldbus.
P3.2.5 STOP FUNCTION (ID 506)
Table 116:
Selection
number
The motor stops on its inertia. When the stop command is

0 Coasting given, the control by the drive stops and the current from the
drive goes to 0.
After the stop command, the speed of the motor is decreased

1 Ramp
to zero speed according to the deceleration parameters.
P3.2.6 I/O A START/STOP LOGIC (ID 300)
It is possible to control the start and stop of the drive with the digital signals in this
parameter.
The selections that include the word edge help you to prevent an accidental start.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

An accidental start can occur, for example, in these conditions

• When you connect the power.
• When the power is connected again after a power cut.
• After you reset a fault.
• After Run Enable stops the drive.
• When you change the control place to I/O control.
Before you can start the motor, you must open the Start/Stop contact.
In all the examples of the next pages, the stop mode is coasting. CS = Control signal.
EQ
Control
V Place IN 1
CTRLPLACE
1 I/O A IN 2 AND
IN 1 IO_StartFunction
V Start Allowed IN 2
Enable Start V I/O Ctrl A(/B) Start
P I/O A (/B)Logic StartStopLogic Reverse V I/O Ctrl A(/B)
Reverse
IO Ctrl Signal 1 A(/B) Signal 1 ForceStopActive V Trig Panel Info
IO Ctrl Signal 2 A(/B) Signal 2
IO Ctrl Signal 3 A(/B) Signal 3
KP StartButton ButtonStart
KeypadStopButton: ForceStop
NO=FALSE
V Trig Panel
YES=TRUE SEL Info Info Message
P KeypadStopButton G Drive has been forced to stop
state from keypad
0 FALSE IN 0
KP StopButton IN 1 Drive can be restarted by
pressing start button on
keypad, as long as the Run
signal is kept continuously
active from the original source
Fig. 27: The block diagram of the I/O A Start/stop logic
Selection
number
The functions activate when the contacts are closed.

0 CS1 = Forward
CS2 = Backward

FWD Output
frequency
Set frequency
t
0 Hz
Set frequency
REV
Run enable
Ctrl signal 1
Ctrl signal 2
Keypad start
button
Keypad stop
button
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Fig. 28: I/O A Start/stop logic = 0

1. Control signal (CS) 1 activates and 9. The Run enable signal is set to TRUE,
causes the output frequency to increase. which causes the frequency to increase
The motor operates forward. to the set frequency, because CS1 is still
2. CS2 activates, but it does not have an active.
effect on the output frequency, because 10. The STOP button on the keypad is
the direction that is set first has the pushed, and the frequency that is fed to
highest priority. the motor goes to 0. (This signal only
3. CS1 becomes inactive and causes the works if the value of P3.2.3 Keypad Stop
direction to start to change (FWD to Button is Yes.)
REV), because CS2 is still active. 11. The drive starts because the START
4. CS2 becomes inactive and the frequency button on the keypad was pushed.
that is fed to the motor goes to 0. 12. The STOP button on the keypad is
5. CS2 activates again and causes the pushed again to stop the drive.
motor to accelerate (REV) to the set 13. The attempt to start the drive with the
frequency. START button is not successful, because
6. CS2 becomes inactive and the frequency CS1 is inactive.
fed to the motor drops to 0.
7. CS1 activates and the motor accelerates
(FWD) to the set frequency
8. The Run enable signal is set to FALSE,
which causes the frequency to go to 0.
Configure the Run enable signal with
parameter P3.5.1.15.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection
number
For a 3-wire control (pulse control)

CS1 = Forward (edge)
1
CS2 = Inverted stop
CS3 = Backward (edge)
FWD
Output
frequency
Set frequency
t
0 Hz
Set frequency
REV
Run enable
Ctrl signal 1
Ctrl signal 2
Ctrl signal 3
Keypad stop
button
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1. Control signal (CS) 1 activates and 7. CS1 activates and the motor accelerates
causes the output frequency to increase. (FWD) to the set frequency, because the
The motor operates forward. Run enable signal was set to TRUE.
2. CS2 becomes inactive and causes the 8. The STOP button on the keypad is
frequency to go to 0. pushed, and the frequency that is fed to
3. CS1 activates and causes the output the motor goes to 0. (This signal only
frequency to increase again. The motor works if the value of P3.2.3 Keypad Stop
operates forward. Button is Yes.)
4. CS3 activates and causes the direction to 9. CS3 activates and causes the motor to
start to change (FWD to REV). start and to operate in the reverse
5. The Run enable signal is set to FALSE, direction.
which causes the frequency to go to 0. 10. CS2 becomes inactive and causes the
Configure the Run enable signal with frequency to go to 0.
parameter 3.5.1.15.
6. The start attempt with CS1 is not
successful, because the Run enable
signal is still FALSE.

Selection
number
Use this function to prevent an accidental start. Before you

2 CS1 = Forward (edge) can start the motor again, you must open the start/stop
CS2 = Backward (edge) contact.
FWD
Output
frequency
Set
frequency
t
0 Hz
Set
frequency
REV
Run enable
Ctrl signal 1
Ctrl signal 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1. Control signal (CS) 1 activates and 8. The Run enable signal is set to FALSE,
causes the output frequency to increase. which causes the frequency to go to 0.
The motor operates forward. Configure the Run enable signal with
2. CS2 activates, but it does not have an parameter P3.5.1.15.
effect on the output frequency, because 9. The Run enable signal is set to TRUE,
the direction that is set first has the which does not have an effect, because a
highest priority. rising edge is necessary for the start,
3. CS1 is becomes inactive and causes the even if CS1 is active.
direction to start to change (FWD to 10. The STOP button on the keypad is
REV), because CS2 is still active. pushed and the frequency that is fed to
4. CS2 becomes inactive and the frequency the motor goes to 0. (This signal only
that is fed to the motor goes to 0. works if the value of P3.2.3 Keypad Stop
5. CS2 activates again and causes the Button is Yes.)
motor to accelerate (REV) to the set 11. CS1 is opened and closed again, which
frequency. causes the motor to start.
6. CS2 becomes inactive and the frequency 12. CS1 becomes inactive and the frequency
that is fed to the motor goes to 0. that is fed to the motor goes to 0.
7. CS1 activates and the motor accelerates
(FWD) to the set frequency.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection
number
3 CS1 = Start
CS2 = Reverse
FWD Output
frequency
Set
frequency
t
0 Hz
Set
frequency
REV
Run enable
Ctrl signal 1
Ctrl signal 2
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5
1. Control signal (CS) 1 activates and 7. The Run enable signal is set to FALSE,
causes the output frequency to increase. which causes the frequency to go to 0.
The motor operates forward. Configure the Run enable signal with
2. CS2 activates and causes the direction to parameter P3.5.1.15.
start to change (FWD to REV). 8. The Run enable signal is set to TRUE,
3. CS2 becomes inactive, which causes the which causes the frequency to increase
direction to start to change (REV to to the set frequency, because CS1 is still
FWD), because CS1 is still active. active.
4. CS1 becomes inactive and the frequency 9. The STOP button on the keypad is
goes to 0. pushed and the frequency that is fed to
5. CS2 activates, but the motor does not the motor goes to 0. (This signal only
start because CS1 is inactive. works if the value of P3.2.3 Keypad Stop
6. CS1 activates and causes the output Button is Yes.)
frequency to increase again. The motor 10. The drive starts because the START
operates forward because CS2 is button on the keypad was pushed.
inactive. 11. The drive is stopped again with the STOP
button on the keypad.

12. The attempt to start the drive with the

START button is not successful, because
CS1 is inactive.
Selection
number
Use this function to prevent an accidental start. Before you

4 CS1 = Start (edge) can start the motor again, you must open the start/stop
CS2 = Reverse contact.
FWD Output
frequency
Set
frequency
t
0 Hz
Set
frequency
REV
Run enable
Ctrl signal 1
Ctrl signal 2
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11
5

1. Control signal (CS) 1 activates and 6. CS1 activates and causes the output
causes the output frequency to increase. frequency to increase again. The motor
The motor operates forward because operates forward, because CS2 is
CS2 is inactive. inactive.
2. CS2 activates, which causes the 7. The Run enable signal is set to FALSE,
direction to start to change (FWD to which causes the frequency to go to 0.
REV). Configure the Run enable signal with
3. CS2 becomes inactive, which causes the parameter P3.5.1.15.
direction to start to change (REV to 8. Before the drive can start, you must
FWD), because CS1 is still active. open and close CS1 again.
4. CS1 becomes inactive and the frequency 9. The STOP button on the keypad is
goes to 0. pushed and the frequency that is fed to
5. CS2 activates, but the motor does not the motor goes to 0. (This signal only
start because CS1 is inactive. works if the value of P3.2.3 Keypad Stop
Button is Yes.)
10. Before the drive can start, you must
open and close CS1 again.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

11. CS1 becomes inactive and the frequency

goes to 0.
9.3 REFERENCES
9.3.1 FREQUENCY REFERENCE

It is possible to program the source of the frequency reference in all the control places,
except the PC tool. If you use your PC, it always takes the frequency reference from the PC
tool.
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (I/O A)
To set the source of the frequency reference for I/O A, use the parameter P3.3.1.5 .
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (I/O B)
To set the source of the frequency reference for I/O B, use the parameter P3.3.1.6.
LOCAL CONTROL PLACE (KEYPAD)
If you use the default value keypad for the parameter P3.3.1.7, the reference that you set for
P3.3.1.8 Keypad Reference applies.
REMOTE CONTROL PLACE (FIELDBUS)
If you keep the default value fieldbus for the parameter P3.3.1.10, the frequency reference
comes from fieldbus.
9.3.2 TORQUE REFERENCE

When the parameter P3.1.2.1 (Control Mode) is set to Torque control open loop, the motor
torque is controlled. The motor speed changes to agree with the actual load on the motor
shaft. P3.3.2.7 (Torque Control Frequency Limit) controls the motor speed limit.
M Torque Reference
FILTER
DEAD ZONE M Final Torque Reference
P Torque Ref Source SCALE IN
Select P Torq Ref Min MIN IN
TC
Select OUT IN LIMIT
V Not Used IN0 P Torq Ref Max MAX
P Keypad Torq Ref IN1
I/O Joystick IN2 P Torq Ref Dead Zone
I/O AI1 IN3 P Torq Ref Filt Time
I/O AI2 IN4
I/O AI3 IN5
I/O AI4 IN6
I/O AI5 IN7
I/O AI6 IN8
FB Process Data In1 IN9
V Block1 IN17
V Block2 IN18
V Block3 IN19
V Block4 IN20
V Block5 IN21
Fig. 33: The torque reference chain diagram

P3.3.2.2 TORQUE MINIMUM REFERENCE (ID 643)
Parameter P3.3.2.2 defines the minimum torque reference of the positive and negative
values.
P3.3.2.3 TORQUE MAXIMUM REFERENCE (ID 642)
Parameter P3.3.2.3 defines the maximum torque reference of the positive and negative
values.
These parameters define the scaling of selected torque reference signal. For instance, the
analogue input signal is scaled between the Torque Reference Minimum and the Torque
Reference Maximum.
Torque
reference
[%]
Torque reference
maximum
0% 50% 100% Analogue input

signal [%]
Torque reference
minimum
Fig. 34: Scaling of the torque reference signal
P3.3.2.7 TORQUE CONTROL FREQUENCY LIMIT (ID 1278)
In the torque control mode, the drive output frequency is always limited between
MinFreqReference and MaxFreqReference (P3.3.1.1 and P3.3.1.2).
You can also make the selection of 2 other modes with this parameter.
Selection 0 = Pos/Neg Freq Limits, that is, the positive/negative frequency limits.
The frequency is limited between Positive Frequency Reference Limit (P3.3.1.3) and Negative
Frequency Reference Limit (P3.3.1.4) (if these parameters are set lower than the value of
P3.3.1.2 Maximum Frequency).
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Output Frequency
[Hz]
P Pos Freq Ref Limit

speed controller active
P Max Freq Reference
Drive in Torque Control
Drive in Torque Control Time
P -Max Freq Reference

P Neg Freq Ref Limit
Fig. 35: Torque control frequency limit, selection 0
Selection 1 = Freq Reference, that is, the frequency reference for both directions.
The frequency is limited by the actual frequency reference (after the ramp generator) for
both directions. That is, the output frequency increases within the set ramp time until the
actual torque is equal to the referenced torque.
Output Frequency
[Hz]

P Pos Freq Ref Limit
R Frequency reference
Ramp Generator output

Drive in Torque Control
Drive in Torque Control Time
R -Frequency Reference
P Neg Freq Ref Limit
Fig. 36: Torque control frequency limit, selection 1
9.3.3 PRESET FREQUENCIES

You can use the Preset frequencies function in processes where more than 1 fixed frequency
reference is necessary. There are 8 preset frequency references available. You can make the
selection of a preset frequency reference with the digital input signals P3.3.3.10, P3.3.3.11,
and P3.3.3.12.
P3.3.3.1 PRESET FREQUENCY MODE (ID 182)
With this parameter, you can set the logic which one of the preset frequencies is selected
into use. There is a selection of 2 different logics.

Selection
number
The mix of the inputs is binary coded. The different sets of

active digital inputs determine the preset frequency. See
0 Binary coded
more data in the Table Table 117 The selection of preset
frequencies when P3.3.3.1 = Binary coded.
The number of active inputs tells which preset frequency is

1 Number (of inputs used)
used: 1, 2 or 3.
P3.3.3.2 PRESET FREQUENCY 0 (ID 180)
VALUE 0 SELECTED FOR PARAMETER P3.3.3.1:
To set Preset Frequency 0 as reference, set the value 0 Preset Frequency 0 for P3.3.1.5 (I/O
Control Reference A Selection).
To make a selection of a preset frequency between 1 and 7, give digital inputs to P3.3.3.10
(Preset Frequency Selection 0), P3.3.3.11 (Preset Frequency Selection 1), and/or P3.3.3.12
(Preset Frequency Selection 2). The different sets of active digital inputs determine the
preset frequency. You can find more data in the table below. The values of the preset
frequencies stay automatically between the minimum and maximum frequencies (P3.3.1.1
and P3.3.1.2).
Necessary step Activated frequency
Make a selection of the value 0 for parameter P3.3.1.5. Preset frequency 0
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Table 117: The selection of preset frequencies when P3.3.3.1 = Binary coded
Activated digital input signal Activated frequency

reference
Preset Freq Sel2 Preset Freq Sel1 Preset Freq Sel0
(P3.3.3.12) (P3.3.3.11) (P3.3.3.10)
Preset frequency 0 Only if

Preset Freq 0 is set as
frequency reference
source with P3.3.3.1.5,
P3.3.1.6, P3.3.1.7 or
P3.3.1.10.
* Preset frequency 1
* * Preset frequency 3
* * * Preset frequency 7
* = the input is activated.
VALUE 1 SELECTED FOR PARAMETER P3.3.3.1:
You can use the Preset Frequencies 1 to 3 with different sets of active digital inputs. The
number of active inputs tells which one is used.

Table 118: The selection of preset frequencies when P3.3.3.1 = Number of inputs
Activated digital input signal Activated frequency

reference
Preset Freq Sel2 Preset Freq Sel1 Preset Freq Sel0
(P3.3.3.12) (P3.3.3.11) (P3.3.3.10)
Preset frequency 0 Only if

Preset Freq 0 is set as
frequency reference
source with P3.3.3.1.5,
P3.3.1.6, P3.3.1.7 or
P3.3.1.10.
* * * Preset frequency 3
* = the input is activated.
P3.3.3.10 PRESET FREQUENCY SELECTION 0 (ID 419)
To apply Preset frequencies 1 to 7, connect a digital input to these functions with the
instructions in Chapter 9.7.1 Programming of digital and analogue inputs. See more data in
Table 117 The selection of preset frequencies when P3.3.3.1 = Binary coded and also in Tables
Table 41 Preset frequency parameters and Table 50 Digital input settings.
9.3.4 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER PARAMETERS

The frequency reference of the Motor Potentiometer is available in all the control places. You
can change the motor potentiometer reference only when the drive is in the run state.
NOTE!
If you set the output frequency slower than the Motor Potentiometer Ramp Time,
the normal acceleration and deceleration times give limits to it.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.3.4.1 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER UP (ID 418)
With a motor potentiometer, you can increase and decrease the output frequency. When you
connect a digital input to parameter Motor Potentiometer UP, and have the digital input
signal active, the output frequency rises.
P3.3.4.2 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER DOWN (ID 417)
With a motor potentiometer, you can increase and decrease the output frequency. When you
connect a digital input to parameter Motor Potentiometer DOWN, and have the digital input
signal active, the output frequency falls.
3 different parameters have an effect on how the output frequency rises or falls when Motor
Potentiometer UP or DOWN is active. These parameters are Motor Potentiometer Ramp
Time (P3.3.4.3), Ramp Acceleration Time (P3.4.1.2), and Ramp Deceleration Time (P3.4.1.3).
Frequency
Reference
Max
Frequency
Motor potentiometer
Min ramp time
Frequency
Time [s]
Motor potentiometer
UP
Motor potentiometer
DOWN
Fig. 37: The motor potentiometer parameters
P3.3.4.4 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER RESET (ID 367)
This parameter defines the logic for the resetting of the frequency reference of the motor
potentiometer.
There are 3 selections in the reset function: no reset, reset when the drive stops, or reset
when the drive is powered down.

Selection
number
The last motor potentiometer frequency reference is kept

0 No reset through the stop state and kept in memory if a powerdown
occurs.
The motor potentiometer frequency reference is set to 0

1 Stop state when the drive goes to the stop state, or when the drive is
powered down.
The motor potentiometer frequency reference is set to 0 only

2 Powered down
when a powerdown occurs.
9.4 JOYSTICK PARAMETERS

Use the joystick parameters when you control the frequency reference or the torque
reference of the motor with a joystick. To control the motor with a joystick, connect the
joystick signal to an analogue input and set the joystick parameters.
CAUTION!
We recommend strongly that you use the Joystick function with analogue inputs of
the range -10V...+10V. In this case, if a wire breaks, the reference does not go to the
maximum value.
P3.3.5.1 JOYSTICK SIGNAL SELECTION (ID 451)
With this parameter, you can set the analogue input signal that controls the Joystick
function.
Use the Joystick function to control the frequency reference of the drive or the torque
reference.
P3.3.5.2 JOYSTICK DEAD ZONE (ID 384)
To ignore the small values of the reference around 0, set this value to be bigger than 0. When
the analogue input signal is 0 ± the value of this parameter, the joystick reference is set to 0.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

MaxFreq
Reference
AI joystick
dead zone = 10%
-10 V +10 V
-100% -10% +100%
+10% Analogue input
-MaxFreq
Fig. 38: The Joystick function
P3.3.5.3 JOYSTICK SLEEP ZONE (ID 385)
P3.3.5.3 JOYSTICK SLEEP DELAY (ID 386)
If the joystick reference stays in the set sleep zone for longer than the sleep delay, the drive
stops and the sleep mode activates.
The value 0 of the parameter tells that the sleep delay is not used.
NOTE!
The Joystick sleep function is available only when you use a joystick to control the
9.5 JOGGING PARAMETERS

Use the Jogging function to override the normal control momentarily. You can use this
function, for example, to control the process slowly to a special status or position during
maintenance. You do not have to change the control place or other parameters.
Only when the drive is in stop state, it is possible to activate the Jogging function. You can
use 2 bi-directional frequency references. You can activate the Jogging function from the

fieldbus or by digital input signals. The Jogging function has a ramp time that is used always
when jogging is active.
The Jogging function starts the drive at the set reference. A new start command is not
necessary. The control place does not have an effect on this.
You can activate the Jogging function from the fieldbus in bypass mode with Control Word
bits 10 and 11.
Output
Frequency
[Hz]
Jogging Ramp
Jogging Ref 1
Jogging Ref 2
Enable DI Jogging
(Digital input signal)
Jogging Ref 1 Activation

Jogging Ref 2 Activation

Fieldbus Control Word Bit 10
Fieldbus Control Word Bit 11
Fig. 39: The Jogging parameters
P3.3.6.1 ENABLE DI JOGGING (ID 532)
This parameter gives the digital input signal that is used to enable jogging commands from
digital inputs. This signal does not have an effect on the jogging commands that come from
Fieldbus.
P3.3.6.2 JOGGING REFERENCE 1 ACTIVATION (ID 530)
P3.3.6.3 JOGGING REFERENCE 2 ACTIVATION (ID 531)
These parameters give the digital input signals that are used to set the frequency reference
for Jogging function and make the drive start. You can use these digital input signals only
when Enable DI Jogging is active.
NOTE!
If you activate Enable DI Jogging and this digital input, the drive starts.
NOTE!
If the 2 activation signals are active at the same time, the drive stops.
P3.3.6.4 JOGGING REFERENCE 1 (ID 1239)
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.3.6.5 JOGGING REFERENCE 2 (ID 1240)
With the parameters P3.3.6.4 and P3.3.6.5, you can set the frequency references for the
jogging function. The references are bi-directional. A reverse command does not have an
effect on the direction of the jogging references. The reference for the forward direction has
a positive value, and the reference for the reverse direction has a negative value. You can
activate the jogging function with digital input signals or from Fieldbus in bypass mode with
Control Word bits 10 and 11.
9.6 RAMPS AND BRAKES SETUP
P3.4.1.1 RAMP 1 SHAPE (ID 500)
P3.4.2.1 RAMP 2 SHAPE (ID 501)
With the parameters Ramp 1 Shape and Ramp 2 Shape, you can make smoother the start
and the end of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. If you set the value to 0.0%, you get
a linear ramp shape. The acceleration and deceleration act immediately to the changes in
the reference signal.
When you set the value between 1.0% and 100.0%, you get an S-shaped acceleration or
deceleration ramp. Use this function to reduce mechanical erosion of the parts and current
spikes when the reference changes. You can modify the acceleration time with parameters
P3.4.1.2 (Acceleration Time 1) and P3.4.1.3 (Deceleration Time 1).
[Hz]
ID103, ID104
ID500
ID500 [t]
Fig. 40: The acceleration/deceleration curve (S-shaped)
P3.4.5.1 FLUX BRAKING (ID 520)
As an alternative to DC braking, you can use flux braking. Flux braking increases the braking
capacity in conditions where additional brake resistors are not necessary.

When braking is necessary, the system decreases the frequency and increases the flux in the
motor. This increases the capacity of the motor to brake. The motor speed is controlled
during braking.
You can enable and disable Flux Braking.
CAUTION!
Use the braking only intermittently. Flux braking converts energy into heat and can
cause damage to the motor.
9.7 I/O CONFIGURATION
9.7.1 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL AND ANALOGUE INPUTS

The programming of inputs of the AC drive is flexible. You can freely use the available inputs
of the standard and optional I/O for different functions.
It is possible to expand the available capacity of I/O with option boards. You can install the
option boards in the slots C, D and E. You can find more data on the installation of option
boards in the Installation manual.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

A.1 A.2 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 A B
Slot A
G F
A E
21 22 23 24 25 26 33 34
Slot B
Fig. 41: The option board slots and programmable inputs

A. Standard board slot A and its terminals E. Option board slot E
B. Standard board slot B and its terminals F. Programmable digital inputs (DI)
C. Option board slot C G. Programmable analogue inputs (AI)
D. Option board slot D
9.7.1.1 Programming of digital inputs
You can find the applicable functions for digital inputs as parameters in parameter group
M3.5.1. To give a digital input to a function, set a value to the correct parameter. The list of
applicable functions shows in Table Table 50 Digital input settings.
Example

A B C
STOP READY I/O

Digital Inputs
ID:405 P3.5.1.11
Ext Fault Close

DigINSlotA.3
Ext Fault Open
DigINSlot0.2
Fault Reset Close
DigINSlotA.6
Fig. 42: The Digital inputs menu in the graphical display
A. The graphical display C. The value of the parameter, that is, the
B. The name of the parameter, that is, the set digital input
function
A B
FWD REV 1/O KEYPAD BUS
C
Fig. 43: The Digital inputs menu in the text display
A. The text display C. The value of the parameter, that is, the
B. The name of the parameter, that is, the set digital input
function
In the standard I/O board compilation, there are 6 digital inputs available: the slot A
terminals 8, 9, 10, 14, 15 and 16.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Input type Input type Slot Input # Explanation

(graphical display) (text
display)
Digital input #1 (terminal 8) on a board in Slot A

DigIN dI A 1
(standard I/O board).
Digital input #2 (terminal 9) on a board in Slot A

DigIN dI A 2
(standard I/O board).
Digital input #3 (terminal 10) on a board in Slot

DigIN dI A 3
A (standard I/O board).

DigIN dI A 4

DigIN dI A 5

DigIN dI A 6
The function External Fault Close, the location of which is the menu M3.5.1, is parameter
P3.5.1.11. It gets the default value DigIN SlotA.3 in the graphical display, and dI A.3 in the text
display. After this selection, a digital signal to the digital input DI3 (terminal 10) controls
External Fault Close.
External fault
P3.5.1.11 DigIN SlotA.3 405 FALSE = OK
close
To change the input from DI3 to, for example, DI6 (terminal 16) on the standard I/O, obey
these instructions.
PROGRAMMING IN THE GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

1 Make a selection of a parameter. To go into the Edit
mode, push the arrow button Right. STOP READY I/O
Digital inputs
ID:405 P3.5.1.11
Ext Fault Close

DigINSlotA3
Ext Fault Open
DigINSlot0.2
Fault Reset Close
DigINSlotA6

2 In the Edit mode, the slot value DigIN SlotA is

underlined and blinks. If you have more digital STOP READY I/O
inputs available in your I/O, for example, because of Ext Fault Close
option boards in slots C, D or E, make a selection of ID:405 P3.5.1.11
them.
DigIN SlotA.3
Min:
Max:
3 To activate the terminal 3, push the arrow button

Right again. STOP READY I/O
Ext Fault Close

ID:405 P3.5.1.11
DigIN SlotA.3
Min:
Max:
4 To change the terminal to 6, push the arrow button

Up 3 times. Accept the change with the OK button. STOP READY I/O
Ext Fault Close
ID:405 P3.5.1.11
DigIN SlotA.6
Min:
Max:
5 If the digital input DI6 was already used for some

other function, a message shows on the display. STOP READY I/O
Change one of these selections.

ID:
At least one digital input has

been selected to several
operations.
To prevent possible unwanted
operations, please check all
digital input selection pa
rameters.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

PROGRAMMING IN THE TEXT DISPLAY

1 Make a selection of a parameter. To go into the Edit READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
mode, push the OK button.
2 In the Edit mode, the letter D blinks. If you have READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
more digital inputs available in your I/O, for
example, because of option boards in slots C, D or
E, make a selection of them.
3 To activate the terminal 3, push the arrow button READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
Right again. The letter D stops blinking.
4 To change the terminal to 6, push the arrow button READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
Up 3 times. Accept the change with the OK button.

5 If the digital input DI6 was already used for some READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
other function, a message scrolls on the display.
Change one of these selections.
After the steps, a digital signal to the digital input DI6 controls the function External Fault
Close.
The value of a function can be DigIN Slot0.1 (in the graphical display) or dI 0.1 (in the text
display). In these conditions, you did not give a terminal to the function, or the the input was
set to be always OPEN. This is the default value of most of parameters in the group M3.5.1.
On the other hand, some inputs have the default value always CLOSED. Their value shows
DigIN Slot0.2 in the graphical display and dI 0.2 in the text display.
NOTE!
You can also give time channels to digital inputs. There is more data about it in
Table Table 86 Sleep function settings.
9.7.1.2 Programming of analogue inputs
You can make a selection of the target input for the signal of the analogue frequency
reference from the available analogue inputs.
A B
STOP READY I/O

Analog Input 1
ID:377 P3.5.2.1.1
AI1 Signal Sel

AnINSlotA.1
AI1 Filter Time
0.10s
AIl Signal Range
0-10V/0-20mA
Fig. 44: The Analogue inputs menu in the graphical display

A. The graphical display C. The value of the parameter, that is, the
B. The name of the parameter set analogue input
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

A C
Fig. 45: The Analogue inputs menu in the text display
A. The text display C. The value of the parameter, that is, the
B. The name of the parameter set analogue input
In the standard I/O board compilation, there are 2 analogue inputs available: the slot A
terminals 2/3 and 4/5.
Input type Input type Slot Input # Explanation

(graphical display) (text
display)
Analogue input #1 (terminals 2/3) on a board in

AnIN AI A 1
Slot A (standard I/O board).
Analogue input #2 (terminals 4/5) on a board in

AnIN AI A 2
Slot A (standard I/O board).
The location of the parameter P3.5.2.1.1 AI1 Signal Selection is the menu M3.5.2.1. The
parameter gets the default value AnIN SlotA.1 in the graphical display or AI A.1 in the text
display. The target input for the signal of the analogue frequency reference AI1 is then the
analogue input in the terminals 2/3. Use the dip switches to set the signal to be voltage or
current. See the Installation manual for more data.
AI1 Signal
P3.5.2.1.1 AnIN SlotA.1 377
Selection
To change the input from AI1 to, for example, the analogue input on your option board in slot
C, obey these instructions.

PROGRAMMING OF ANALOGUE INPUTS IN THE GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

1 To make a selection of the parameter, push the
arrow button Right. STOP READY I/O
Analogue Input 1
ID:377 P3.5.2.1.1
AI1 Signal Sel

AnIN SlotA.1
AI1 Filter Time
0.10s
AI1 Signal Range
0-10V/0-20mA
2 In the Edit mode, the value AnIN SlotA is underlined

and blinks. STOP READY I/O
AI1 Signal Sel

ID:377 P3.5.2.1.1
AnIN SlotA.1
Min:
Max:
3 To change the value to AnIN SlotC, push the arrow

button Up. Accept the change with the OK button. STOP READY I/O
AI1 Signal Sel
ID:377 P3.5.2.1.1
AnIN SlotC.1
Min:
Max:
PROGRAMMING OF ANALOGUE INPUTS IN THE TEXT DISPLAY

1 To make a selection of the parameter, push the OK READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
button.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

2 In the Edit mode, the letter A blinks. READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
3 To change the value to C, push the arrow button READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
Up. Accept the change with the OK button.

9.7.1.3 Descriptions of signal sources
Source Function
Slot0.# Digital inputs:
You can use this function to set a digital signal to be in a constant FALSE
or TRUE state. The manufacturer set some signals so that they are
always in the TRUE state, for example parameter P3.5.1.15 (Run Enable).
The Run Enable signal is always on if you do not change it.
# = 1: Always FALSE
# = 2-10: Always TRUE
Analogue inputs (used for testing purposes):
# = 1: Analogue input = 0% of the signal strength

# = 3: Analogue input = 30% of the signal strength etc.
SlotA.# Number (#) agrees to a digital input in slot A.
SlotB.# Number (#) agrees to a digital input in slot B.
SlotC.# Number (#) agrees to a digital input in slot C.
SlotD.# Number (#) agrees to a digital input in slot D.
SlotE.# Number (#) agrees to a digital input in slot E.
TimeChannel.# 1=Time Channel1, 2=Time Channel2, 3=Time Channel3
FieldbusCW.# Number (#) refers to a control word bit number.
FieldbusPD.# Number (#) refers to the process data 1 bit number.
BlockOut.# Number (#) refers to an output of the corresponding function block in the
Drive customizer.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

9.7.2 DEFAULT FUNCTIONS OF PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
Table 119: Default functions of the programmable digital and analogue inputs
Input Terminal(s) Reference Function Parameter index
DI1 8 A.1 Control Signal 1 A P3.5.1.1
DI2 9 A.2 Control Signal 2 A P3.5.1.2
DI3 10 A.3 External Fault Close P3.5.1.11
Preset Frequency P3.5.1.21

DI4 14 A.4
Selection 0
Preset Frequency P3.5.1.22

DI5 15 A.5
Selection 1
DI6 16 A.6 Fault Reset Close P3.5.1.13
AI1 2/3 A.1 AI1 Signal Selection P3.5.2.1.1
AI2 4/5 A.2 AI2 Signal Selection P3.5.2.2.1
9.7.3 DIGITAL INPUTS

The parameters are functions that you can connect to a digital input terminal. The text DigIn
Slot A.2 means the second input on the slot A. It is also possible to connect the functions to
time channels. The time channels work as terminals.
You can monitor the statuses of the digital inputs and the digital outputs in the
Multimonitoring view.
P3.5.1.15 RUN ENABLE (ID 407)
When the contact is OPEN, the start of the motor is disabled.

When the contact is CLOSED, the start of the motor is enabled.
To stop, the drive obeys the value of P3.2.5 Stop Function. The follower drive will always
coast to stop.
P3.5.1.16 RUN INTERLOCK 1 (ID 1041)
P3.5.1.17 RUN INTERLOCK 2 (ID 1042)
If an interlock is active, the drive cannot start.

You can use this function to prevent the start of the drive when the damper is closed. If you
activate an interlock during the operation of the drive, the drive stops.
P3.5.1.49 PARAMETER SET 1/2 SELECTION (ID 496)
This parameter defines the digital input, which can be used to select between Parameter Set
1 and Set 2. This function is enabled if any other slot than ‘DigIN Slot0’ is selected to this
parameter. The parameter set selection is allowed only when the drive is stopped.

Contact Open = Parameter Set 1 is loaded as the active set

Contact Closed = Parameter Set 2 is loaded as the active set
NOTE!
Parameter values are stored to Set 1 and Set 2 by parameters B6.5.4 Save to Set 1
and B6.5.4 Save to Set 2. These parameters can be used either from keypad or
Vacon Live pc-tool.
P3.5.1.50 (P3.9.9.1) USER DEFINED FAULT 1 ACTIVATION (ID 15523)
Use this parameter to set the digital input signal that activates User Defined Fault 1 (Fault ID
1114).
P3.5.1.51 (P3.9.10.1) USER DEFINED FAULT 2 ACTIVATION (ID 15524)
Use this parameter to set the digital input signal that activates User Defined Fault 2 (Fault ID
1115).
9.7.4 ANALOGUE INPUTS
P3.5.2.1.2 AI1 SIGNAL FILTER TIME (ID 378)
This parameter filters out disturbances in the analogue input signal. To activate this
parameter, give it a value that is bigger than 0.
NOTE!
A long filter time makes the regulation response slow.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Analogue input
signal
[%]
Unfiltered signal
100%
Filtered signal
63%
t [s]
ID378
Fig. 46: The AI1 signal filtering
P3.5.2.1.3 AI1 SIGNAL RANGE (ID 379)
To set the type of the analogue input signal (current or voltage), use the dip switches on the
control board. See more in the Installation manual.
It is also possible to use the analogue input signal as frequency reference. The selection of
the value 0 or 1 change the scaling of the analogue input signal.
Selection
number
The range of the analogue input signal is 0...10V or 0...20mA

0 0...10V / 0...20mA (the dip switch settings on the control board tell which one).
The input signal is 0...100%.

Frequency
reference
[Hz]
Max freq
reference
Analogue
Min freq input
reference 0% 50% 100% signal [%]
0 mA 10 mA 20 mA
Fig. 47: The analogue input signal range, selection 0
Selection
number
The range of the analogue input signal is 2...10V or 4...20mA

1 2...10V / 4...20mA (the dip switch settings on the control board tell which one).
The input signal is 20...100%.
Frequency
reference
[Hz]
Max freq
reference
Analogue
Min freq input
reference 0% 20% 50% 100% signal [%]
0 mA 4 mA 10 mA 20 mA
Fig. 48: The analogue input signal range, selection 1
P3.5.2.1.4 AI1 CUSTOM. MIN (ID 380)
P3.5.2.1.5 AI1 CUSTOM. MAX (ID 381)
The parameters P3.5.2.1.4 and P3.5.2.1.5 let you adjust the range of the analogue input
signal between -160 and 160% freely.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

For example, you can use the analogue input signal as frequency reference, and set these 2
parameters between 40 and 80%. In these conditions, the frequency reference changes
between the Minimum frequency reference and the Maximum frequency reference, and the
analogue input signal changes between 8 and 16 mA.
Frequency
reference
[Hz]
Max freq
reference
Min freq Analogue input

reference 0% 40% 80% 100% signal [%]
0 mA 8 mA 16 mA 20 mA
AI custom AI custom
min max
Fig. 49: AI1 signal custom. min/max
P3.5.2.1.6 AI1 SIGNAL INVERSION (ID 387)
In the inversion on the analogue input signal, the curve of the signal becomes the opposite.
It is possible to use the analogue input signal as frequency reference. The selection of the
value 0 or 1 change scaling of the analogue input signal.
Selection
number
No inversion. The value 0% of the analogue input signal

agrees to the Minimum Frequency Reference. The value
0 Normal
100% of the the analogue input signal agrees to the
Maximum Frequency Reference.

Frequency
reference
[Hz]
Max freq
reference

reference 0% 50% 100% signal [%]
0 mA 10 mA 20 mA
Fig. 50: AI1 signal inversion, selection 0
Selection
number
Signal inversion. The value 0% of the analogue input signal

agrees to the Maximum Frequency Reference. The value
1 Inverted
100% of the analogue input signal agrees to the Minimum
Frequency Reference.
Frequency
reference
[Hz]
Max freq
reference

reference 0% 50% 100% signal[%]
0 mA 10 mA 20 mA
Fig. 51: AI1 signal inversion, selection 1
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

9.7.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
P3.5.3.2.1 BASIC RO1 FUNCTION (ID 11001)
Table 120: The output signals through RO1
Selection
number
0 Not used The output is not used.
1 Ready The AC drive is ready to operate.
2 Run The AC drive operates (the motor runs).
3 General fault A fault trip occurred.
4 General fault inverted A fault trip did not occur.
5 General alarm An alarm occurred.
6 Reversed The reverse command is given.
At speed The output frequency has become the same as the set
7
8 Thermistor fault A thermistor fault occurred.
Motor regulator activated One of the limit regulators (for example current limit or
9
torque limit) is activated.
10 Start signal active The start command of the drive is active.
Keypad control active The selection is keypad control (the active control place is
11
keypad).
I/O control B active The selection is I/O control place B (the active control place
12
is I/O B).
13 Limit supervision 1 The limit supervision activates if the signal value goes below
or above the set supervision limit (P3.8.3 or P3.8.7).
14 Limit supervision 2
15 Fire mode active The Fire mode function is active.
16 Jogging active The Jogging function is active.
Preset Frequency active The selection of preset frequency was made with digital input
17
signals.
18 Quick Stop active The Quick stop function is activated.
19 PID in Sleep mode The PID controller is in the sleep mode.
20 PID Soft Fill activated The Soft fill function of the PID controller is activated.
PID feedback supervision The feedback value of the PID controller is not in the
21
supervision limits.

Selection
number
ExtPID feedback supervision The External PID controller feedback value is not in the
22
supervision limits.
Input pressure alarm The input pressure of the pump is below the value that was
23
set with parameter P3.13.9.7.
Frost protection alarm The measured temperature of the pump is below the level
24
that was set with parameter P3.13.10.5.
25 Motor 1 control The contactor control for the Multi-pump function.
31 Time channel 1 The status of Time channel 1.
Fieldbus Control Word bit 13 The digital (relay) output control from the Fieldbus control
34
word bit 13.
35
word bit 14.
36
word bit 15.
Fieldbus Process Data In1 bit 0 The digital (relay) output control from the Fieldbus Process
37
Data In1, bit 0.
38
Data In1, bit 1.
39
Data In1, bit 2.
Maintenance counter 1 alarm The maintenance counter reached the alarm limit that is set
40
with parameter P3.16.2.
Maintenance counter 1 fault The maintenance counter reached the alarm limit that is set
41
with parameter P3.16.3.
42 Mechanical brake control The Open mechanical brake command.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection
number
Mechanical brake control The Open mechanical brake command (inverted).

43
(Inverted)
Block Out.1 The output of the programmable Block 1. See parameter

44
menu M3.19 Drive customizer.

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52
53
54 Jockey pump control The control signal for the external jockey pump.
55 Priming pump control The control signal for the external priming pump.
56 Auto-cleaning active The Pump auto-cleaning function is activated.
Motor Switch Open The Motor Switch function has detected that the switch
57
between the drive and the motor is open.
58 TEST (Always Closed)
59 Motor preheat active
9.7.6 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
P3.5.4.1.1. AO1 FUNCTION (ID 10050)
The contents of the analogue output signal 1 are specified in this parameter. The scaling of
the analogue output signal depends on the signal.

Selection
number
Test 0% (Not used) The analogue output is set to 0% or 20% so that it agrees
0
with parameter P3.5.4.1.3.
TEST 100% The analogue output is set to 100% of the signal (10V /
1
20mA).
Output frequency The actual output frequency from 0 to Maximum frequency

2
reference.
Frequency reference The actual frequency reference from 0 to Maximum

3
4 Motor speed The actual motor speed from 0 to Motor nominal speed.
Output current The output current of the drive from 0 to Motor nominal
5
current.
Motor torque The actual motor torque from 0 to motor nominal torque
6
(100%).
Motor power The actual motor power from 0 to Motor nominal power
7
(100%).
8 Motor voltage The actual motor voltage from 0 to Motor nominal voltage.
9 DC-link voltage The actual DC-link voltage 0…1000V.
10 PID Setpoint The actual setpoint value of the PID Controller (0…100%).
11 PID Feedback The actual feedback value of the PID Controller (0…100%).
12 PID output The output of the PID controller (0…100%).
13 ExtPID output The External PID controller output (0…100%).
Fieldbus Process Data In 1 Fieldbus Process Data In 1: 0…10000 (this agrees with 0…
14
100.00%).
15
100.00%).
16
100.00%).
17
100.00%).
18
100.00%).
19
100.00%).
20
100.00%).
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection
number
21
100.00%).
Block Out.1 The output of the programmable Block 1: 0…10000 (this

22 agrees with 0…100.00%). See parameter menu M3.19 Drive
customizer.

customizer.

customizer.

customizer.

customizer.

customizer.

28 agrees with 0…100,00%). See parameter menu M3.19 Drive
customizer.

customizer.

customizer.
customizer.
P3.5.4.1.4 AO1 MINIMUM SCALE (ID 10053)
P3.5.4.1.5 AO1 MAXIMUM SCALE (ID 10054)
You can use these 2 parameters to adjust the scaling of the analogue output signal freely.
The scale is defined in process units and it depends on the selection of parameter P3.5.4.1.1
AO1 Function.
For example, you can make a selection of the output frequency of the drive for the contents
of the analogue output signal, and set parameters P3.5.4.1.4 and P3.5.4.1.5 between 10 and

40 Hz. Then the output frequency of the drive changes between 10 and 40 Hz, and the
analogue output signal changes between 0 and 20 mA.
Analogue
output signal
[%]
100%
20 mA
50%
10 mA
0% Output
0 mA frequency
0 Hz 10 Hz 40 Hz Max freq [Hz]
reference
AO min AO max
scale scale
Fig. 52: The scaling of the AO1 signal
9.8 PROHIBIT FREQUENCIES

In some processes it can be necessary to avoid some frequencies because they make
problems of mechanical resonance. With the Prohibit frequencies function, it is possible to
prevent the usage of these frequencies. When the input frequency reference increases, the
internal frequency reference stays at the low limit, until the input frequency reference is
above the high limit.
P3.7.1 PROHIBIT FREQUENCY RANGE 1 LOW LIMIT (ID 509)
P3.7.2 PROHIBIT FREQUENCY RANGE 1 HIGH LIMIT (ID 510)
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Actual Reference
High Lim
Low Lim
Low High Requested

Lim Lim Reference
Fig. 53: The prohibited frequencies
P3.7.7 RAMP TIME FACTOR (ID 518)
The Ramp Time Factor sets the acceleration and the deceleration time when the output
frequency is in a prohibited frequency range. The value of the Ramp Time Factor is multiplied
with the value of P3.4.1.2 (Acceleration Time 1) or P3.4.1.3 (Deceleration Time 1). For
example, the value 0.1 makes the acceleration/deceleration time ten times shorter.
Output Frequency
[Hz]
High Lim
Ramp Time Ramp Time

Factor = 0.3 Factor = 2.5
Low Lim
Time [s]
Fig. 54: The parameter Ramp Time Factor
9.9 SUPERVISIONS
P3.9.1.2 RESPONSE TO EXTERNAL FAULT (ID 701)
With this parameter, you can set the response of the drive to an external fault. If a fault
occurs, the drive can show a notification of it on the display of the drive. The notification is

made in a digital input. The default digital input is DI3. You can also program the response
data into a relay output.
P3.9.1.14 RESPONSE TO SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) FAULT (ID 775)
This parameter defines the response for F30 – Safe Torque Off (Fault ID: 530).
This parameter defines drive operation when Safe Torque Off (STO) function is activated (e.g.
emergency stop button has been pressed or some other STO operation has been activated).
0 = No action
1 = Alarm
2 = Fault, stop according to defined stop function P3.2.5 Stop Function
3 = Fault, stop by coasting
9.9.1 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTIONS

The motor thermal protection prevents the motor from becoming too hot.
The AC drive can supply a current that is higher than the nominal current. The high current
can be necessary to the load, and it must be used. In these conditions, there is a risk of a
thermal overload. Low frequencies have a higher risk. At low frequencies, the cooling effect
and the capacity of the motor decrease. If the motor has an external fan, the load reduction
at low frequencies is small.
The motor thermal protection is based on calculations. The protection function uses the
output current of the drive to know what is the load on the motor. If the control board is not
energised, the calculations are reset.
To adjust the thermal protection of the motor, use the parameters from P3.9.2.1 to P3.9.2.5.
You can monitor the thermal status of the motor on the display of the control panel. See
Chapter 3 User interfaces.
NOTE!
If you use long motor cables (max. 100 m) with small drives (≤1.5 kW), the motor
current that the drive measures can be much higher than the actual motor current.
It is because there are capacitive currents in the motor cable.
CAUTION!
Make sure that the airflow to the motor is not blocked. If the airflow is blocked, the
function does not protect the motor, and the motor can become too hot. This can
cause damage to the motor.
P3.9.2.3 ZERO SPEED COOLING FACTOR (ID 706)
When the speed is 0, this function calculates the cooling factor in relation to the point where
the motor operates at a nominal speed without external cooling.
The default value is set for conditions where there is no external fan. If you use an external
fan, you can set the value higher than without the fan, for example at 90%.
If you change parameter P3.1.1.4 (Motor Nominal Current), parameter P3.9.2.3 is
automatically set to its default value.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Although you change this parameter, it does not have an effect on the maximum output
current of the drive. Only parameter P3.1.3.1 Motor Current Limit can change the maximum
output current.
The corner frequency for the thermal protection is 70% of the value of the parameter
P3.1.1.2 Motor Nominal Frequency.
Pcooling
Overload area
100% IT
ID706=40%
0 Corner freq fn f
Fig. 55: The motor thermal current IT curve
P3.9.2.4 MOTOR THERMAL TIME CONSTANT (ID 707)
The time constant is the time during which the calculated warming curve becomes 63% of its
target value. The length of the time constant is in relation with the dimension of the motor.
The bigger the motor, the longer the time constant.
In different motors, the motor thermal time constant is different. It also changes between
different motor manufacturers. The default value of the parameter changes from dimension
to dimension.
The t6-time is the time in seconds that the motor can safely operate at 6 times the rated
current. It is possible that the motor manufacturer gives the data with the motor. If you know
the t6 of the motor, you can set the time constant parameter with its help. Usually, the motor
thermal time constant in minutes is 2*t6. When the drive is in the STOP state, the time
constant is internally increased to 3 times the set parameter value, because the cooling
operates based on convection.

I/I T
Current
t
T
100%
63%
t
T = Motor thermal time constant
Fig. 56: The motor thermal time constant
P3.9.2.5 MOTOR THERMAL LOADABILITY (ID 708)
For example, if you set the value to 130%, the motor goes to the nominal temperature with
130% of the motor nominal current.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

I/IT
Current
t
Fault/
Alarm
T
Trip area
105%
t
Loadability 80%
Loadability 100%
Loadability 130%
Fig. 57: The calculation of the motor temperature
9.9.2 MOTOR STALL PROTECTION

The motor stall protection function gives protection to the motor against short overloads. An
overload can be caused, for example, by a stalled shaft. It is possible to set the reaction time
of the stall protection shorter than that of the motor thermal protection.
The stall status of the motor is specified with parameters P3.9.3.2 Stall Current and P3.9.3.4
Stall Frequency Limit. If the current is higher than the limit, and the output frequency is
lower than the limit, the motor is in a stall status.
The stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
NOTE!

P3.9.3.2 STALL CURRENT (ID 710)
You can set the value of this parameter between 0.0 and 2*IL. For a stall status to occur, the
current must be higher than this limit. If parameter P3.1.3.1 Motor Current Limit changes,
this parameter is automatically calculated to 90% of the current limit.
NOTE!
The value of the Stall Current must be below the motor current limit.
Stall area
ID710
f
ID712
Fig. 58: The stall characteristics settings
P3.9.3.3 STALL TIME LIMIT (ID 711)
You can set the value of this parameter between 1.0 and 120.0 s. This is the maximum time
for the stall status to be active. An internal counter counts the stall time.
If the stall time counter value goes above this limit, the protection causes the drive to trip.
9.9.3 UNDERLOAD PROTECTION

The motor underload protection makes sure that there is a load on the motor when the drive
operates. If the motor loses the load, a problem can occur in the process. For example, a belt
can break or a pump become dry.
You can adjust the motor underload protection with parameters P3.9.4.2 (Underload
Protection: Field Weakening Area Load) and P3.9.4.3 (Underload Protection: Zero Frequency
Load). The underload curve is a squared curve between the zero frequency and the field
weakening point. The protection is not active below 5 Hz. The underload time counter does
not operate below 5 Hz.
The values of the underload protection parameters are set in percentage of the nominal
torque of the motor. To find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value, use the data in the
name plate data of the motor, the motor nominal current and the nominal current of the
drive IH. If you use another current than the nominal motor current, the precision of the
calculation decreases.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

NOTE!
P3.9.4.2 UNDERLOAD PROTECTION: FIELD WEAKENING AREA LOAD (ID 714)
You can set the value of this parameter between 10.0 and 150.0% x TnMotor. This value is the
limit for the minimum torque when the output frequency is above the field weakening point.
If you change parameter P3.1.1.4 (Motor Nominal Current), this parameter goes
automatically back to its default value. See 9.9.3 Underload protection.
Torque
ID714
ID715
Underload area
5 Hz Field weakening
point
Fig. 59: Setting of the minimum load
P3.9.4.4 UNDERLOAD PROTECTION: TIME LIMIT (ID 716)
You can set the time limit between 2.0 and 600.0 s.
This is the maximum time for an underload status to be active. An internal counter counts
the underload time. If the value of the counter goes above this limit, the protection causes
the drive to trip. The drive trips as is set in parameter P3.9.4.1 Underload Fault. If the drive
stops, the underload counter goes back to 0.

Underload time counter
Trip area
ID716
Trip/warning
ID713
Time
Underload•
No underl.
Fig. 60: The Underload time counter function
P3.9.5.1 QUICK STOP MODE (ID 1276)
P3.9.5.2 (P3.5.1.26) QUICK STOP ACTIVATION (ID 1213)
P3.9.5.3 QUICK STOP DECELERATION TIME (ID 1256)
P3.9.5.4 RESPONSE TO QUICK STOP FAULT (ID 744)
With the quick stop function, you can stop the drive in an unusual procedure from I/O or
Fieldbus in unusual conditions. When the quick stop function is active, you can make the
drive decelerate and stop. It is possible to program an alarm or fault to put a mark in the
fault history that there was a request for a quick stop.
CAUTION!
Do not use the quick stop function as an emergency stop. An emergency stop must
stop the power supply to the motor. The quick stop function does not do this.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

FB Control Word B12
I/O Quick Stop Activ. Normal

operation
OR Quick Stop
IN 1
Activated
IN 2
Yes
Start stop
sequence
according to
Quick Stop Mode
and Quick Stop
Deceleration
Time
Drive
stopped? NO
Yes
Drive forced to
Not Ready status
and alarm/fault
triggered
according to
Quick Stop Fault
Quick Stop
Activated
Fig. 61: The quick stop logic
P3.9.8.1 ANALOGUE INPUT LOW PROTECTION (ID 767)
Use the AI Low Protection to find failures in the analogue input signals. This function gives
protection only to the analogue inputs that are used as frequency reference, torque
reference, or in the PID/ExtPID controllers.
You can have the protection on when the drive is in the RUN status, or in the RUN and STOP
statuses.

Selection
number
1 Protection disabled
Protection enabled in RUN The protection is enabled only when the drive is in the RUN
2
status status.
Protection enabled in RUN and The protection is enabled in the 2 statuses, RUN and STOP.
3
STOP status
P3.9.8.2 ANALOGUE INPUT LOW FAULT (ID 700)
If AI Low Protection is enabled with parameter P3.9.8.1, this parameter gives a response for
the fault code 50 (Fault ID 1050).
The AI low protection function monitors the signal level of the analogue inputs 1-6. If the
analogue input signal becomes less than 50% of the minimum signal for 3 s, an AI Low fault
or alarm shows.
NOTE!
You can use the value Alarm + Previous Freq only when you use analogue input 1 or
analogue input 2 as frequency reference.
Selection
number
0 No Action AI Low Protection is not used.
1 Alarm
The frequency reference is set as in P3.9.1.13 Preset Alarm

2 Alarm, preset frequency
Frequency.
3 Alarm, previous frequency The last valid frequency is kept as frequency reference.
4 Fault The drive stops as is set in P3.2.5 Stop Mode.
5 Fault, coasting The drive stops by coasting.
P3.9.9.2 RESPONSE TO USER DEFINED FAULT 1 (ID 15525)
This parameter sets the response to User Defined Fault 1 (Fault ID 1114), that is, how the
drive operates when the fault occurs.
P3.9.10.2 RESPONSE TO USER DEFINED FAULT 2 (ID 15526)
This parameter sets the response to User Defined Fault 2 (Fault ID 1115), that is, how the
drive operates when the fault occurs.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

9.10 AUTOMATIC RESET
P3.10.1 AUTOMATIC RESET (ID 731)
Use parameter P3.10.1 to enable the Automatic reset function. To make a selection of faults
that are reset automatically, give the value 0 or 1 to parameters from P3.10.6 to P3.10.13.
NOTE!
The automatic reset function is available only for some fault types.
P3.10.3 WAIT TIME (ID 717)
P3.10.4 TRIAL TIME (ID 718)
Use this parameter to set the trial time for the automatic reset function. During the trial
time, the automatic reset function tries to reset the faults that occur. The time count starts
from the first automatic reset. The next fault starts the trial time count again.
P3.10.5 NUMBER OF TRIALS (ID 759)
If the number of trials during the trial time is more than the value of this parameter, a
permanent fault shows. If not, the fault goes out of view after the trial time is completed.
With parameter P3.10.5, you can set the maximum number of automatic reset trials during
the trial time set in P3.10.4. The fault type does not have an effect on the maximum number.

Wait Wait Wait

time time time
ID717 ID717 ID717
Fault trigger
Alarm
Reset 1 Reset 2
Autoreset
Trial time Trial time

ID718
Fault active
Number of trials: (ID759 = 2)

Fig. 62: The Automatic reset function
9.11 TIMER FUNCTIONS

The timer functions make it possible for the internal RTC (Real Time Clock) to control
functions. All the functions that can be controlled with a digital input, can also be controlled
with the RTC, with time channels 1-3. It is not necessary to have an external PLC to control a
digital input. You can program the closed and opened intervals of the input internally.
To get the best results of the timer functions, install a battery, and make the settings of the
Real Time Clock carefully in the Start-up wizard. The battery is available as an option.
NOTE!
We do not recommend that you use the timer functions without an auxiliary battery.
The time and date settings of the drive are reset at each power down, if there is no
battery for the RTC.
TIME CHANNELS
You can assign the output of the interval and/or timer functions to time channels 1-3. You can
use the time channels to control on/off type functions, for example relay outputs or digital
inputs. To configure the on/off logic of the time channels, assign intervals and/or timers to
them. A time channel can be controlled by many different intervals or timers.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P AssignToChannel
Interval 1
TimeChannel 1
Interval 2
Interval 3
Interval 4
TimeChannel 2
Interval 5
Timer 1
Timer 2
TimeChannel 3
Timer 3
Fig. 63: Assigning intervals and timers to time channels is flexible. Every interval and timer has a
parameter with which you can assign them to a time channel.
INTERVALS
Use parameters to give each interval an ON Time and OFF Time. It is the daily active time of
the interval during the days set with parameters From Day and To Day. For example, with the
parameter settings below, the interval is active from 7 am to 9 am from Monday to Friday.
The time channel is like a digital input, but virtual.
ON Time: 07:00:00
OFF Time: 09:00:00
From Day: Monday
To Day: Friday
TIMERS
Use the timers to set a time channel as active for a period with a command from a digital
input or a time channel.

Remaining
time
Time
Activation
Duration OUT
Fig. 64: The activation signal comes from a digital input or a virtual digital input, like a time
channel. The timer counts down from the falling edge.
The parameters below will set the timer active when the digital input 1 on the slot A is
closed. They will also keep the timer active for 30 s after it is opened.
• Duration: 30 s
• Timer: DigIn SlotA.1
You can use a duration of 0 seconds to override a time channel that is activated from a digital
input. There is no off delay after the falling edge.
Example:
Problem:
The AC drive is in a warehouse and controls air conditioning. It must operate between 7 am
and 5 pm on weekdays and between 9 am and 1 pm on weekends. It is also necessary for the
drive to operate outside these hours, if there are personnel in the building. The drive must
continue to operate 30 minutes after the personnel has left.
Solution:
Set 2 intervals, 1 for weekdays and 1 for weekends. A timer is also necessary to activate the
process outside the set hours. See the configuration below.
Interval 1
P3.12.1.1: ON Time: 07:00:00
P3.12.1.2: OFF Time: 17:00:00
P3.12.1.3: Days: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday
P3.12.1.4: Assign to channel: Time channel 1
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

STOP READY I/O

Interval 1
ID:1466 M3.12.1.3
ON Time
07:00:00
OFF Time
17:00:00
Days
0
Fig. 65: Using timer functions to make an interval
STOP READY I/O

Days
ID: M3.12.1.3
Edit
Help
Add to favourites
Fig. 66: Going into the Edit mode
STOP READY I/O

Days
ID: M3.12.1.3.1
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Fig. 67: The checkbox selection for the weekdays
Interval 2
P3.12.2.1: ON Time: 09:00:00
P3.12.2.2: OFF Time: 13:00:00
P3.12.2.3: Days: Saturday, Sunday
Timer 1
P3.12.6.1: Duration: 1800 s (30 min)
P3.12.6.2: Timer 1: DigIn SlotA.1 (The parameter is located in the digital inputs menu.)
P3.5.1.1: Control signal 1 A: Time Channel 1 for the I/O Run command

Interval 1
Days = Monday to Friday
ON = 07:00:00 hrs OFF = 17:00:00 hrs P Ctrl Signal 1A
Interval 2
Days = Saturday and Sunday
Time channel 1 Start/Stop
ON = 09:00:00 hrs OFF = 13:00:00 hrs
Digital input 1
on Slot A Timer 1
Duration = 1800 s
Fig. 68: Time channel 1 is used as the control signal for the start command instead of a digital
input
9.12 PID CONTROLLER
P3.13.1.9 DEAD BAND (ID 1056)
P3.13.1.10 DEAD BAND DELAY (ID 1057)
If the actual value stays in the dead band area for a time set in Dead Band Delay, the PID
controller output is locked. This function prevents wear and unwanted movements of the
actuators, for example valves.
Dead band (ID1056) Reference
Actual value
Dead band delay (ID1057)
Output locked
Fig. 69: The Dead band function
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

9.12.1 FEEDFORWARD
P3.13.4.1 FEEDFORWARD FUNCTION (ID 1059)
Accurate process models are usually necessary for the Feedforward function. In some
conditions, a gain and offset type of feedforward is sufficient. The feedforward part does not
use the feedback measurements of the actual controlled process value. The feedforward
control uses other measurements that have an effect on the controlled process value.
EXAMPLE 1:
You can control the water level of a tank with flow control. The target water level is set as a
setpoint, and the actual level as feedback. The control signal monitors the flow that comes
in.
The outflow is like a disturbance that you can measure. With the measurements of the
disturbance, you can try to adjust this disturbance with a feedforward control (gain and
offset) that you add to the PID output. The PID controller reacts much faster to changes in
the outflow than if you only measure the level.
Level ref
+ +
PID FFW
LT FT Outflow
control
Level control
Fig. 70: The feedforward control
9.12.2 SLEEP FUNCTION
P3.13.5.1 SP1 SLEEP FREQUENCY (ID 1016)
The drive goes to sleep mode (that is, the drive stops) when the output frequency of the drive
is less than the frequency limit that is set in this parameter.
The value of this parameter is used when the signal of the PID controller setpoint is taken
from the setpoint source 1.

Criterias for going to sleep mode

• Output frequency remains below sleep frequency for longer than defined sleep delay
time
• PID feedback signal remains above defined wake up level
Criterias for waking from sleep

• PID feedback signal falls below defined wake up level
NOTE!
A wrong set wake up level might not allow the drive to go into sleep mode
P3.13.5.2 SP1 SLEEP DELAY (ID 1017)
The drive goes to sleep mode (that is, the drive stops) when the output frequency of the drive
is less than the sleep frequency limit for longer than the time that is set in this parameter.
The value of this parameter is used when the signal of the PID controller setpoint is taken
from the setpoint source 1.
P3.13.5.3 SP1 WAKE-UP LEVEL (ID 1018)
P3.13.5.4 SP1 WAKE-UP MODE (ID 1019)
With these parameters, you can set when the drive wakes up from the sleep mode.
The drive wakes up from the sleep mode when the value of PID Feedback goes below the
Wake-up level.
This parameter defines if Wake-up level is used as a static absolute level or as a relative
level which follows PID setpoint value.
Selection 0 = Absolute level (The wake-up level is a static level that does not follow the
setpoint value.)
Selection 1 = Relative setpoint (The wake-up level is an offset below the actual setpoint
value. The wake-up level follows the actual setpoint.)
Setpoint PID Setpoint
Wake Up Level
t
Fig. 71: Wake-up Mode: absolute level
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Setpoint PID Setpoint
Wake Up Level
t
Fig. 72: Wake-up Mode: relative setpoint
P3.13.5.5 SP2 SLEEP FREQUENCY (ID 1075)
See the description of parameter P3.13.5.1.
P3.13.5.6 SP2 SLEEP DELAY (1076)
P3.13.5.7 SP2 WAKE-UP LEVEL (ID 1077)
P3.13.5.8 SP2 WAKE-UP MODE (ID 1020)
See the description of parameter P3.13.5.4
9.12.3 FEEDBACK SUPERVISION

Use the feedback supervision to make sure that the PID Feedback value (the process value
or the actual value) stays in the set limits. With this function you can, for example, find a pipe
break and stop the flooding.
These parameters set the range in which the PID Feedback signal stays in correct
conditions. If the PID Feedback signal does not stay in the range, and this continues longer
than the delay, a Feedback supervision fault (the fault code 101) shows.

P3.13.6.1 ENABLE FEEDBACK SUPERVISION (ID 735)
Actual value
Upper limit
(ID736)
Reference
Lower limit
(ID758)
Delay (ID737)
Regulating mode Alarm or fault

Fig. 73: The Feedback supervision function
P3.13.6.2 UPPER LIMIT (ID 736)
P3.13.6.3 LOWER LIMIT (ID 758)
Set the upper limit and the lower limit around the reference. When the actual value is less or
more than the limits, a counter starts to count up. When the actual value is between the
limits, the counter counts down. When the counter gets a value that is higher than the value
of P3.13.6.4 Delay, an alarm or a fault shows. You can make a selection of the response with
parameter P3.13.6.5 (Response to PID1 Supervision Fault).
9.12.4 PRESSURE LOSS COMPENSATION

When you pressurise a long pipe that has many outlets, the best position for the sensor is in
the middle of the pipe (the position 2 in the figure). You can also put the sensor directly after
the pump. This gives the right pressure directly after the pump, but farther in the pipe, the
pressure drops with the flow.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Pressure
No flow
With flow
Pipe length
PT PT
Position 1 Position 2
Fig. 74: The position of the pressure sensor
P3.13.7.1 ENABLE COMPENSATION FOR SETPOINT 1 (ID 1189)
P3.13.7.2 SETPOINT 1 MAX COMPENSATION (ID 1190)
The sensor is put in position 1. The pressure in the pipe stays constant when there is no flow.
But with flow, the pressure decreases farther in the pipe. To compensate for this, lift the
setpoint as the flow increases. Then the output frequency makes an estimate of the flow, and
the setpoint increases linearly with the flow.

Setpoint
Setpoint + Max compensation
Setpoint
Min Freq and Flow Max Freq and Flow

Pressure
With flow a
No flow nd compen
sation
Pipe length
P P
T T
Position 1 Position 2
Fig. 75: Enable setpoint 1 for pressure loss compensation
9.12.5 SOFT FILL

The Soft fill function is used to move the process to a set level at a slow speed before the PID
controller starts to control. If the process does not go to the set level during the timeout, a
fault shows.
You can use the function to fill an empty pipe slowly and prevent strong currents of water
that could break the pipe.
We recommend that you always use the Soft fill function when you use the Multipump
function.
P3.13.8.1 ENABLE SOFT FILL (ID 1094)
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.13.8.2 SOFT FILL FREQUENCY (ID 1055)
P3.13.8.3 SOFT FILL LEVEL (ID 1095)
P3.13.8.4. SOFT FILL TIMEOUT (ID 1096)
The drive operates at the soft fill frequency until the feedback value is equal with the soft fill
level. If the feedback value does not become equal with the soft fill level, during the timeout,
an alarm or fault shows. You can make a selection of the response with parameter P3.13.8.5
(PID Soft Fill Timeout Response).
Reference
Actual value
Soft fill level
Frequency
Soft fill frequency
Soft fill mode Regulating mode

Fig. 76: The Soft fill function
9.12.6 INPUT PRESSURE SUPERVISION

Use the Input pressure supervision to make sure that there is enough water in the inlet of
the pump. When there is enough water, the pump does not suck air and there is no suction
cavitation. To use the function, install a pressure sensor on the pump inlet.
If the input pressure of the pump goes below the set alarm limit, an alarm shows. The
setpoint value of the PID controller decreases and causes the output pressure of the pump to
decrease. If the pressure goes below the fault limit, the pump is stops and a fault shows.

Mains
PT
Inlet Outlet
Fig. 77: The location of the pressure sensor
Input Pressure
Input Pressure Monitor

Supervision
Alarm Level
Supervision
Fault Level
PID Setpoint Supervision Supervision

Fault Delay Fault Delay
PID Setpoint
PID Setpoint
Reduction
Input Pressure Alarm

(Digital output signal)
Motor Running Yes
No
Fig. 78: The Input pressure supervision function
9.12.7 FROST PROTECTION

Use the Frost protection function to protect the pump from frost damages. If the pump is in
sleep mode and the temperature that is measured in the pump goes below the set protection
temperature, operate the pump at a constant frequency (that is set in P3.13.10.6 Frost
Protection Frequency). To use the function, you must install a temperature transducer or a
temperature sensor on the pump covering or on the pipe line near the pump.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

9.13 MULTIPUMP FUNCTION

The Multi-pump function lets you control a maximum of 6 motors, pumps or fans with the
PID controller.
The AC drive is connected to a motor, which is the regulating motor. The regulating motor
connects and disconnects the other motors to/from the mains with relays. This is done to
keep the right setpoint. The Autochange function controls the sequence in which the motors
start to make sure that they wear equally. You can include the regulating motor in the
autochange and interlock logic, or set it to always be Motor 1. It is possible to remove motors
momentarily with the Interlock function, for example for maintenance.
Bandwidth Setpoint
Feedback
Delay
ON
M1 OFF
ON
M2 OFF
Drive is running at maximum

or close to maximum frequency
Fig. 79: The Multipump function
If the PID controller cannot keep the feedback in the set bandwidth, a motor or motors are
connected or disconnected.
When to connect and/or add motors:

• The feedback value is not in the bandwidth area.
• The regulating motor operates at a close to maximum frequency (-2 Hz).
• The conditions above are true for longer than the bandwidth delay.
• There are more motors available
When to disconnect and/or remove motors:

• The feedback value is not in the bandwidth area.
• The regulating motor operates at a close to minimum frequency (+2 Hz).
• The conditions above are true for longer than the bandwidth delay.
• There are more motors that operate than the regulating one.

P3.15.2 INTERLOCK FUNCTION (ID 1032)
The interlocks tell the Multipump system that a motor is not available. This can occur when
the motor is removed from the system for maintenance or bypassed for manual control.
To use the interlocks, enable the parameter P3.15.2. Make a selection of the status for each
motor with a digital input (the parameters from P3.5.1.34 to P3.5.1.39). If the value of the
input is CLOSED, that is, active, the motor is available for the Multipump system. If not, the
Multipump logic will not connect it.
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
Starting order of motors
Fig. 80: The interlock logic 1
The sequence of the motors is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

If you remove the interlock of Motor 3, that is, you set the value of P3.5.1.36 is set to OPEN,
the sequence changes to 1, 2, 4, 5.
ID428 =FALSE
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
Starting order of motors
If you add Motor 3 again (you set the value of P3.5.1.36 to CLOSED), the system puts Motor 3
last in the sequence: 1, 2, 4, 5, 3. The system does not stop, but continues to operate.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

ID428 = TRUE
M1 M2 M4 M5 M3
New starting order of motors
When the system stops or goes to sleep mode for the next time, the sequence changes back
to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
P3.15.3 INCLUDE FC (ID 1028)
Selection
number
The drive is always connected to Motor 1. The interlocks do

0 Disabled not have an effect on Motor 1. Motor 1 is not included in the
autochange logic.
It is possible to connect the drive to any of the motors in the

1 Enabled system. The interlocks have an effect on all the motors. All
the motors are included in the autochange logic.
WIRING
The connections are different for the parameter values 0 and 1.
SELECTION 0, DISABLED
The drive is directly connected to Motor 1. The other motors are auxiliary motors. They are
connected to the mains by contactors, and controlled by relays of the drive. The autochange
or the interlock logic do not have an effect on Motor 1.

Mains
K2 K3
M1 M2 M3
Motor 1 control from relay Motor 2 control from relay Motor 3 control from relay
NOT USED K2 K3
Fig. 83: Selection 0
SELECTION 1, ENABLED
To include the regulating motor in the autochange or in the interlock logic, obey the
instructions in the figure below. 1 relay controls each motor. The contactor logic always
connects the first motor to the drive, and the next motors to the mains.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Mains
K1 K1.1 K2 K2.1 K3 K3.1
M1 M2 M3
Motor 1 control Motor 2 control Motor 3 control
from relay from relay from relay
K3 K2 K3 K3 K1 K3 K1 K2 K1
K2 K1 K2
K1.1 K1 K2.1 K2 K3.1 K3
K1 K1.1 K2 K2.1 K3 K3.1
Fig. 84: Selection 1

P3.15.4 AUTOCHANGE (ID 1027)
Selection
number
In normal operation, the sequence of the motors is always 1,

2, 3, 4, 5. The sequence can change during the operation if
0 Disabled
you add or remove interlocks. After the drive stops, the
sequence always changes back.
The system changes the sequence at intervals to wear the

1 Enabled motors equally. You can adjust the intervals of the
autochange.
To adjust the intervals of the autochange, use P3.15.5 Autochange Interval. You can set the
maximum number of motors that can operate with parameter Autochange: Motor Limit
(P3.15.7). You can also set the maximum frequency of the regulating motor (Autochange:
Frequency Limit P3.15.6).
When the process is in the limits that are set with parameters P3.15.6 and P3.15.7, the
autochange occurs. If process is not in these limits, the system will wait until the process is
in the limits, and do the autochange after that. This prevents sudden pressure drops during
the autochange when a high capacity at a pump station is necessary.
EXAMPLE
After an autochange, the first motor is put last. The other motors move up 1 position.
The start sequence of the motors: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
--> Autochange -->
--> Autochange -->
P3.15.16.1 ENABLE OVERPRESSURE SUPERVISION (ID 1698)
You can use the Overpressure supervision function in a Multipump system. For example,
when you close the primary valve of the pump system quickly, the pressure in the pipe lines
increases. The pressure can increase too quickly for the PID controller. To prevent that the
pipes break, the overpressure supervision stops the auxiliary motors in the Multipump
system.
The overpressure supervision monitors the feedback signal of the PID controller, that is, the
pressure. If the signal becomes higher than the overpressure level, it stops all the auxiliary
pumps immediately. Only the regulating motor continues to operate. When the pressure
decreases, the system continues to operate, and connects the auxiliary motors again one at a
time.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Pressure
PID Feedback
Superv. (ID21)
Alarm Level
ID1699
PID Setpoint
ID167
M2
ON
OFF
M3 ON
OFF
Fig. 85: The Overpressure supervision function
9.14 MAINTENANCE COUNTERS

A maintenance counter tells you that maintenance must be done. For example, it is
necessary to replace a belt or to replace the oil in a gearbox. There are 2 different modes for
the maintenance counters, hours or revolutions*1000. The value of the counters increases
only during the RUN status of the drive.
WARNING!
Do not do maintenance if you are not approved to do it. Only an approved electrician
can do maintenance. There is a risk of injury.
NOTE!
The revolutions mode uses motor speed, which is only an estimate. The drive
measures the speed every second.
When the value of a counter is more than its limit, an alarm or a fault shows. You can
connect the alarm and fault signals to a digital output or a relay output.
When the maintenance is completed, reset the counter with a digital input or parameter
P3.16.4 Counter 1 Reset.
9.15 FIRE MODE

When Fire mode is active, the drive resets all faults that occur and continues to operate at
the same speed until it is not possible. The drive ignores all commands from the keypad,
fieldbuses, and the PC tool. It only obeys the signals Fire Mode Activation, Fire Mode
Reverse, Run Enable, Run Interlock 1, and Run Interlock 2 from I/O.
The Fire mode function has 2 modes, the Test mode and the Enabled mode. To make a
selection of a mode, write a password in parameter P3.17.1 (Fire Mode Password). In the
Test mode, the drive does not automatically reset the faults, and the drive stops when a fault
occurs.
It is also possible to configure Fire mode with the Fire mode wizard, which you can activate in
the Quick Setup menu with parameter B1.1.4.

When you activate the Fire mode function, an alarm shows on the display.
CAUTION!
The warranty is void if the Fire mode function is activated! You can use Test mode
to test the Fire mode function and the warranty stays valid.
P3.17.1 FIRE MODE PASSWORD (ID 1599)
Use this parameter to make a selection of the mode of the Fire mode function.
Selection
number
The drive resets all the faults and continues to operate at the
1002 Enabled mode
same speed until it is not possible
The drive does not automatically reset the faults, and the
1234 Test mode
drive stops when a fault occurs.
P3.17.3 FIRE MODE FREQUENCY (ID 1598)
With this parameter, you can set the frequency reference that is used when Fire mode is
active. The drive uses this frequency when the value of parameter P3.17.2 Fire Mode
Frequency Source is Fire Mode Frequency.
P3.17.4 FIRE MODE ACTIVATION ON OPEN (ID 1596)
If this digital input signal is activated, an alarm shows on the display, and the warranty
becomes void. The type of this digital input signal is NC (normally closed).
It is possible to try the Fire mode with the password that activates the Test mode. Then the
warranty stays valid.
NOTE!
If Fire mode is enabled, and you give the correct password to the parameter Fire
Mode Password, all the Fire mode parameters become locked. To change the Fire
mode parameters, change the value of P3.17.1 Fire Mode Password to 0 first.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Normal
Start
Run
Enable
Run
Interlock 1
Run
Interlock 2
Fire Mode
Activation
(Close contact)
Motor Speed
Fire Mode
Speed
Normal
Speed
Stopped
Fig. 86: The Fire mode function
P3.17.5 FIRE MODE ACTIVATION ON CLOSE (ID 1619)
The type of this digital input signal is NO (normally open). See the description for P3.17.4 Fire
Mode Activation on Open.
P3.17.6 FIRE MODE REVERSE (ID 1618)
Use this parameter to make a selection of the rotation direction of the motor during Fire
mode. The parameter does not have an effect in normal operation.
If it is necessary for the motor to operate always FORWARD or always REVERSE in Fire
Mode, make a selection of the correct digital input.
DigIn Slot0.1 = always FORWARD

DigIn Slot0.2 = always REVERSE
9.16 MOTOR PREHEAT FUNCTION
P3.18.1 MOTOR PREHEAT FUNCTION (ID 1225)
The Motor preheat function keeps the drive and the motor warm during the STOP status. In
the motor preheat, the system gives the motor a DC current. The motor preheat prevents for
example condensation.

Selection
number
0 Not used The Motor preheat function is disabled.
The Motor preheat function is activated always when the

1 Always in Stop state
drive is in the Stop state.
The Motor preheat function is activated by a digital input

signal, when the drive is in the Stop state. You can make the
2 Controlled by digital input
selection of the digital input for the activation with parameter
P3.5.1.18.
The Motor preheat function is activated if the drive is in the

Stop state, and the temperature of the heatsink of the drive
3 Temperature limit (heatsink)
goes below the temperature limit that was set with
parameter P3.18.2.
The Motor preheat function is activated if the drive is in the

Stop state, and the measured motor temperature goes below
the temperature limit that was set with parameter P3.18.2.
You can set the measurement signal of the motor
Temperature limit (measured temperature with parameter P3.18.5.
4
motor temperature)
NOTE!
To use this operation mode, you must have an option board
for temperature measurement (for example OPT-BH).
9.17 MECHANICAL BRAKE

You can monitor the mechanical brake with the monitoring value Application Status Word 1
in the monitoring group Extras and advanced.
The Mechanical brake control function controls an external mechanical brake with a digital
output signal. The mechanical brake is opened/closed when the drive output frequency
breaks the opening/closing limits.
P3.20.1 BRAKE CONTROL (ID 1541)
Table 121: The selection of the operation mode of the mechanical brake
Selection
number
0 Disabled The mechanical brake control is not used.
The mechanical brake control is used, but there is no

1 Enabled
supervision of the brake status.
Enabled with brake status The mechanical brake control is used, and a digital input
2
supervision signal monitors the brake status (P3.20.8).
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Output Frequency 5 6
Brake
Mech. Delay
Close Frequency Limit 7
ID1539
4
Open Frequency Limit 3
ID1535
2
Start Command
1
Open Mech. Brake
Command (Digital output)
Fig. 87: The Mechanical brake function

1. A Start command is given. 5. The output frequency of the drive follows
2. We recommend that you use start the normal frequency reference.
magnetisation to build rotor flux fast and 6. A Stop command is given.
to decrease the time when the motor can 7. The mechanical brake becomes closed
produce nominal torque. when the output frequency goes below
3. When the start magnetisation time is the close frequency limit.
over, the system lets the the frequency
reference go to the open frequency limit.
4. The mechanical brake opens. The
frequency reference stays at the open
frequency limit until the brake
mechanical delay is over, and the correct
brake feedback signal is received.
AND
V Running IN 1
IN 2
GE
M Output Frequency IN 1
P Open Freq Limit RS
IN 2
SET I/O MechanicBrake
RESET
NOT
IN I/O MechanicBrakeInv
LE AND OR
M Output Frequency IN 1 IN 1 IN 1
P Close Freq Limit IN 2 IN 2 IN 2
NOT OR
V Running IN IN 1
IN 2
NOT
V Run Request IN IN 3
V Fault
LT
M Motor Current IN 1
P Brake Current Limit IN 2
Fig. 88: The mechanical brake opening logic

P3.20.2 BRAKE MECHANICAL DELAY (ID 353)
After the brake opening command is given, the speed stays at the value of the parameter
P3.20.3 (Brake Opening Frequency Limit) until the brake mechanical delay is expired. Set the
delay time to agree with the reaction time of the mechanical brake.
The Brake mechanical delay function is used to prevent current and/or torque spikes. This
prevents the motor from operating at full speed against the brake. If you use P3.20.2 at the
same time with P3.20.8, it is necessary to have the expired delay and the feedback signal to
release the speed reference.
P3.20.3 BRAKE OPENING FREQUENCY LIMIT (ID 1535)
The value of the parameter P3.20.3 is the output frequency limit of the drive to open the
mechanical brake. In open loop control, we recommend that you use a value that is equal to
the nominal slip of the motor.
The output frequency of the drive stays at this level until the brake mechanical delay is
expired, and the system receives the correct brake feedback signal.
P3.20.4 BRAKE CLOSING FREQUENCY LIMIT (ID 1539)
The value of the parameter P3.20.3 is the output frequency limit of the drive to close the
mechanical brake. The drive stops and the output frequency goes near 0. You can use the
parameter for the 2 directions, positive and negative.
P3.20.5 BRAKE CURRENT LIMIT (ID 1085)
The Mechanical brake closes immediately if the motor current is below the limit set in
parameter Brake Current Limit. We recommend that you set the value to approximately half
of the magnetisation current.
When the drive operates on the field weakening area, the brake current limit decreases
automatically as a function of output frequency.
Current (A)
Brake
current limit
ID1085
Field weakening area
Output
Field weakening point frequency (Hz)
ID602
Fig. 89: Internal reduction of the brake current limit
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

P3.20.8 (P3.5.1.44) BRAKE FEEDBACK (ID 1210)
This parameter includes the digital input selection for the status signal of the mechanical
brake. The Brake feedback signal is used if the value for parameter P3.20.1 is Enabled with
brake status supervision.
Connect this digital input signal to an auxiliary contact of the mechanical brake.
The contact is open = the mechanical brake is closed

The contact is closed = the mechanical brake is open
If the brake opening command is given, but the contact of the brake feedback signal does not
close in given time, a mechanical brake fault shows (fault code 58).
9.18 PUMP CONTROL
9.18.1 AUTO-CLEANING
Use the Auto-cleaning function to remove dirt or other material from the pump impeller. You
can also use the function to clear a blocked pipe or valve. You can use the auto-cleaning, for
example, in wastewater systems to keep the performance of the pump satisfactory.
P3.21.1.1 CLEANING FUNCTION (ID 1714)
If you enable the parameter Cleaning Function, the auto-cleaning starts, and activates the
digital input signal in parameter P3.21.1.2.
P3.21.1.2 CLEANING ACTIVATION (ID 1715)
P3.21.1.3 CLEANING CYCLES (ID 1716)
The parameter Cleaning Cycles tells how many times the forward or the reverse cleaning
cycle is done.
P3.21.1.4 CLEAN FORWARD FREQUENCY (ID 1717)
The Auto-cleaning function accelerates and decelerates the pump to remove the dirt.
You can set the frequency and time of the cleaning cycle with the parameters P3.21.1.4,
P3.21.1.5, P3.21.1.6 and P3.21.1.7.
P3.21.1.5 CLEAN FORWARD TIME (ID 1718)
See parameter P3.21.1.4 Clean Forward Frequency.
P3.21.1.6 CLEAN REVERSE FREQUENCY (ID 1719)
P3.21.1.7 CLEAN REVERSE TIME (ID 1720)

P3.21.1.8 CLEANING ACCELERATION TIME (ID 1721)
You can set acceleration and deceleration ramps for the Auto-cleaning function with
parameters P3.21.1.8 and P3.21.1.9.
P3.21.1.9 CLEANING DECELERATION TIME (ID 1722)
You can set acceleration and deceleration ramps for the Auto-cleaning function with
parameters P3.21.1.8 and P3.21.1.9.
Output
Cleaning
Frequency Forward
Time
Cleaning
Forward Frequency
Zero Frequency
Cleaning
Reverse Frequency
Cleaning
Reverse
Time
Cleaning Cycles Cycle1 Cycle2
Cleaning Function
Cleaning Activation
Fig. 90: The Auto-cleaning function
9.18.2 JOCKEY PUMP
P3.21.2.1 JOCKEY FUNCTION (ID 1674)
A Jockey pump is a smaller pump that keeps the pressure in the pipeline, when the main
pump is in the sleep mode. This can occur, for example, in the night.
The Jockey pump function controls a jockey pump with a digital output signal. You can use a
jockey pump if a PID controller is used to control the main pump. The function has 3
operation modes.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Selection
number
0 Not used
The jockey pump starts when the PID Sleep of the main
1 PID sleep pump activates. The jockey pump stops when the main pump
wakes up from the sleep mode.
The jockey pump starts when the PID Sleep activates, and
the PID feedback signal is less than the level set by
2 PID sleep (level) parameter P3.21.2.2. The jockey pump stops when the PID
feedback signal is more than the level set in parameter
P3.21.2.3 or the main pump wakes up from the sleep mode.
PID Feedback
JockeyStopLevel
Jockey Start Level

PID Controller
Wake Up Level
Output Freq
PID Sleep
Delay
PID Sleep
Jockey Pump Control

(Selected value = PID Sleep)
Jockey Pump Control

(Selected value =
PID Sleep (Level))
Fig. 91: The Jockey pump function
9.18.3 PRIMING PUMP

A priming pump is a smaller pump that primes the inlet of the main pump to prevent suction
of air.

The priming pump function controls a priming pump with a digital output signal. You can set
a delay to start the priming pump before the main pump starts. The priming pump operates
continuously while the main pump operates.
Start
Command
(Main Pump)
Priming Pump
Control
(Digital Output Signal) Priming
Time
Output Freq
(Main Pump)
Fig. 92: The Priming pump function
P3.21.3.1 PRIMING FUNCTION (ID 1677)
Parameter P3.21.3.1 enables the control of an external priming pump with a digital output.
You must first set priming pump control as the value of the digital output.
P3.21.3.2 PRIMING TIME (ID 1678)
The value of this parameter tells how much before the start of the main pump the priming
pump must start.
9.19 TOTAL AND TRIP COUNTERS

The Vacon® AC drive has different counters based on the operation time of the drive and the
energy consumption. Some of the counters measure total values and some can be reset.
The energy counters measure the energy that is taken from the supply network. The other
counters are used to measure, for example, the operation time of the drive or the run time of
the motor.
It is possible to monitor all the counter values from the PC, keypad or fieldbus. If you use the
keypad or the PC, you can monitor the counter values in the Diagnostics menu. If you use
fieldbus, you can read the counter values with the ID numbers. In this chapter, you find data
on these ID numbers.
9.19.1 OPERATING TIME COUNTER

It is not possible to reset the operating time counter of the control unit. The counter is in the
submenu Total counters. The value of the counter has 5 different 16-bit values. To read the
value of the counter through fieldbus, use these ID numbers.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

• ID 1754 Operating Time Counter (years)

• ID 1755 Operating Time Counter (days)
• ID 1756 Operating Time Counter (hours)
• ID 1757 Operating Time Counter (minutes)
• ID 1758 Operating Time Counter (seconds)
Example: You receive the value 1a 143d 02:21 of the operating time counter from the fieldbus.
• ID1754: 1 (years)
• ID1755: 143 (days)
• ID1756: 2 (hours)
• ID1757: 21 (minutes)
• ID1758: 0 (seconds)
9.19.2 OPERATING TIME TRIP COUNTER

The operating time trip counter of the control unit can be reset. It is in the submenu Trip
counters. It is possible to reset the counter with the PC, the control panel, or the fieldbus.
The value of the counter has 5 different 16-bit values. To read the value of the counter
through fieldbus, use these ID numbers.
• ID 1766 Operating Time Trip Counter (years)

• ID 1767 Operating Time Trip Counter (days)
• ID 1768 Operating Time Trip Counter (hours)
• ID 1769 Operating Time Trip Counter (minutes)
• ID 1770 Operating Time Trip Counter (seconds)
Example: You receive the value 1a 143d 02:21 of the operating time trip counter from the
fieldbus.
• ID1766: 1 (years)
• ID1767: 143 (days)
• ID1768: 2 (hours)
ID 2311 OPERATING TIME TRIP COUNTER RESET
You can reset the operating time trip counter with the PC, the control panel, or the fieldbus.
If you use the PC or the control panel, reset the counter in the Diagnostics menu.
If you use the fieldbus, to reset the counter, set a rising edge (0 => 1) to ID2311 Operating
Time Trip Counter Reset.
9.19.3 RUN TIME COUNTER

The run time counter of the motor cannot be reset. It is in the submenu Total counters. The
value of the counter has 5 different 16-bit values. To read the value of the counter through
fieldbus, use these ID numbers.

• ID 1772 Run Time Counter (years)

• ID 1773 Run Time Counter (days)
• ID 1774 Run Time Counter (hours)
• ID 1775 Run Time Counter (minutes)
• ID 1776 Run Time Counter (seconds)
Example: You receive the value 1a 143d 02:21 of the run time counter from the fieldbus.
• ID1772: 1 (years)
• ID1773: 143 (days)
• ID1774: 2 (hours)
9.19.4 POWER ON TIME COUNTER

The power on time counter of the power unit is in the submenu Total counters. It is not
possible to reset the counter. The value of the counter has 5 different 16-bit values. To read
the value of the counter through fieldbus, use these ID numbers.
• ID 1777 Power On Time Counter (years)

• ID 1778 Power On Time Counter (days)
• ID 1779 Power On Time Counter (hours)
• ID 1780 Power On Time Counter (minutes)
• ID 1781 Power On Time Counter (seconds)
Example: You receive the value 1a 240d 02:18 of the power on time counter from the fieldbus.
• ID1777: 1 (years)
• ID1778: 240 (days)
• ID1779: 2 (hours)
9.19.5 ENERGY COUNTER

The energy counter counts the total quantity of energy that the drive gets from the supply
network. The counter cannot be reset. To read the value of the counter through fieldbus, use
these ID numbers.
ID 2291 Energy Counter
The value has always 4 digits. The format and the unit of the counter change to agree with
the energy counter value. See the example below.
Example:
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

• 0.001 kWh
• 0.010 kWh
• 0.100 kWh
• 1.000 kWh
• 10.00 kWh
• 100.0 kWh
• 1.000 MWh
• 10.00 MWh
• 100.0 MWh
• 1.000 GWh
• etc...
ID2303 Energy Counter Format
The energy counter format gives the position of the decimal point in the value of the Energy
Counter.
• 40 = 4 digits, 0 fractional digits

• 41 = 4 digits, 1 fractional digit
Example:
• 0.001 kWh (Format = 43)

• 100.0 kWh (Format = 41)
• 10.00 MWh (Format = 42)
ID2305 Energy Counter Unit
The energy counter unit gives the unit for the value of the Energy Counter.
• 0 = kWh
• 1 = MWh
• 2 = GWh
• 3 = TWh
• 4 = PWh
Example: If you receive the value 4500 from ID2291, the value 42 from ID2303, and the value 0
from ID2305, the result is 45.00 kWh.
9.19.6 ENERGY TRIP COUNTER

The energy trip counter counts the quantity of energy that the drive gets from the supply
network. The counter is in the submenu Trip counters. You can reset the counter with the PC,
the control panel, or the fieldbus. To read the value of the counter through fieldbus, use
these ID numbers.
ID 2296 Energy Trip Counter
The value has always 4 digits. The format and the unit of the counter change to agree with
the energy trip counter value. See the example below. You can monitor the energy counter

format and unit with ID2307 Energy Trip Counter Format and ID2309 Energy trip Counter
unit.
Example:
• 0.001 kWh
• 0.010 kWh
• 0.100 kWh
• 1.000 kWh
• 10.00 kWh
• 100.0 kWh
• 1.000 MWh
• 10.00 MWh
• 100.0 MWh
• 1.000 GWh
• etc...
ID2307 Energy Trip Counter Format
The energy trip counter format gives the position of the decimal point in the value of the
Energy Trip Counter.

• 41 = 4 digits, 1 fractional digit
Example:
• 0.001 kWh (Format = 43)

• 100.0 kWh (Format = 41)
• 10.00 MWh (Format = 42)
ID2309 Energy Trip Counter Unit
The energy trip counter unit gives the unit for the value of the Energy Trip Counter.
• 0 = kWh
• 1 = MWh
• 2 = GWh
• 3 = TWh
• 4 = PWh
ID2312 Energy Trip Counter Reset
To reset the energy trip counter, use the PC, the control panel, or the fieldbus. If you use the
PC or the control panel, reset the counter in the Diagnostics menu. If you use the fieldbus,
set a rising edge to ID2312 Energy Trip Counter Reset.
9 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

FAULT TRACING VACON · 319
10 FAULT TRACING
When the control diagnostics of the AC drive find an unusual condition in the operation of the
drive, the drive shows a notification about it. You can see the notification on the display of the
control panel. The display shows the code, the name and a short description of the fault or
alarm.
The source info tells you the source of the fault, what caused it, where it occurred, and other
data.
There are 3 different types of notification.

• An info does not have an effect the operation of the drive. You must reset the info.
• An alarm informs you of unusual operation on the drive. It does not stop the drive. You
must reset the alarm.
• A fault stops the drive. You must reset the drive and find a solution to the problem.
You can program different responses for some faults in the application. See more in Chapter
5.9 Group 3.9: Protections.
Reset the fault with the Reset button on the keypad, or through the I/O terminal, fieldbus or
the PC tool. The faults stay in the Fault history where you can go and examine them. See the
different fault codes in Chapter 10.3 Fault codes.
Before you contact the distributor or the factory because of unusual operation, prepare some
data. Write down all the texts on the display, the fault code, the fault ID, the source info, the
Active Faults list and the Fault History.
10.1 A FAULT COMES INTO VIEW

When the drive shows a fault and stops, examine the cause of fault, and reset the fault.
There are 2 procedures to reset a fault: with the Reset button and with a parameter.
RESETTING WITH THE RESET BUTTON
1 Push the Reset button on the keypad for 2 secods.
RESETTING WITH A PARAMETER IN THE GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
1 Go to the Diagnostics Menu.

STOP READY I/O
Main Menu
ID: M4
Monitor
( 5 )
Parameters
( 12)
Diagnostics
( 6 )

VACON · 320 FAULT TRACING
2 Go to the submenu Reset faults.

STOP READY I/O
Diagnostics
ID: M4.1
Active faults
( 0 )
Reset faults
Fault history
( 39 )
3 Make a selection of the parameter Reset Faults.

STOP READY I/O
Reset faults
ID: M4.2
Reset faults
Help
RESETTING WITH A PARAMETER IN THE TEXT DISPLAY
1 Go to the Diagnostics menu. READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
2 Use the arrow buttons Up and Down to find the READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
parameter Reset Faults.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

3 Make a selection of the value Yes and push OK. READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT
10.2 FAULT HISTORY

In the Fault history, you can find more data on the faults. There is a maximum number of 40
faults in the Fault history.
EXAMINING THE FAULT HISTORY IN THE GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
1 To see more data on a fault, go to Fault history.

STOP READY I/O
Diagnostics
ID: M4.1
Active faults
( 0 )
Reset faults
Fault history
( 39 )
2 To examine the data of a fault, push the Arrow

button Right. STOP READY I/O
Fault history
ID: M4.3.3
External Fault 51
Fault old 891384s
External Fault 51
Fault old 871061s
Device removed 39
Info old 862537s

3 You see the data in a list.

STOP READY I/O
Fault history
ID: M4.3.3.2
Code 39
ID 380
State Info old
Date 7.12.2009
Time 04:46:33
Operating time 862537s
Source 1
Source 2
Source 3
EXAMINING THE FAULT HISTORY IN THE TEXT DISPLAY
1 Push OK to go to Fault history. FAULT

2 To examine the data of a fault, push OK again. FAULT

10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

3 Use the arrow button down to examine all the data. FAULT

10.3 FAULT CODES
Fault
Fault ID Fault name Possible cause How to correct the fault
code
1 1 Overcurrent There is too high a current Do a check of the loading. Do a

(hardware fault) (>4*I H) in the motor cable. check of the motor. Do a check of
Its cause can be 1 of these. the cables and connections. Make
2 Overcurrent (software an identification run. Set the
fault) acceleration time longer (P3.4.1.2
• a sudden heavy load and P3.4.2.2).
increase
• a short circuit in the
motor cables
• the motor is not the
correct type
• the parameter settings
are not properly made
2 10 Overvoltage The DC-link voltage is Set the deceleration time longer

(hardware fault) higher than the limits. (P3.4.1.3 and P3.4.2.3). Use the
brake chopper or the brake
11 Overvoltage (software resistor. They are available as
fault) • too short a options. Activate the overvoltage
deceleration time controller. Do a check of the input
• high overvoltage spikes voltage.
in the supply
3 20 Earth fault (hardware The measurement of Do a check of the motor cables and
fault) current tells that the sum of the motor. Do a check of the filters.
the motor phase current is
21 Earth fault (software not zero.
fault)
• an insulation
malfunction in the
cables or the motor
• a filter (du/dt, sinus)
malfunction
5 40 Charging switch The charging switch is Reset the fault and restart the
closed and the feedback drive. Do a check of the feedback
information is OPEN. signal and the cable connection
between the control board and the
power board. If the fault occurs
• operation malfunction again, ask instructions from the
• defective component distributor near to you.
7 60 Saturation This fault cannot be reset from the

• Defective IGBT control panel. Switch off the power.
• de-saturation short DO NOT RESTART THE DRIVE or
circuit in the IGBT CONNECT THE POWER! Ask
• a short circuit or an instructions from the factory.
overload in the brake
resistor
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
8 600 System fault There is no communication Reset the fault and restart the
between the control board drive. Download the latest software
601 and the power. from the Vacon website. Update
the drive with it. If the fault occurs
602 Defective component. again, ask instructions from the
Operation malfunction. distributor near to you.
603 Defective component.

Operation malfunction. The
voltage of auxiliary power in
the power unit is too low.

Operation malfunction.
Output phase voltage does
not agree to the reference.
Feedback fault.

606 The software of the control

unit is not compatible with
the software of the power
unit.
607 The software version cannot

be read. There is no
software in the power unit.
Defective component.
Operation malfunction (a
problem in the power board
or the measurement board).
608 A CPU overload.
609 Defective component. Reset the fault and make a power

Operation malfunction. down of the drive twice. Download
the latest software from the Vacon
website. Update the drive with it.

Fault
code
8 610 System fault Defective component. Reset the fault and restart.
Operation malfunction. Download the latest software from
the Vacon website. Update the
614 Configuration error. drive with it. If the fault occurs
Software error. Defective again, ask instructions from the
component (a defective distributor near to you.
control board). Operation
malfunction.

648 Operation malfunction. The

system software is not
compatible with the
application.
649 A resource overload. A Load the factory default settings.

parameter loading, Download the latest software from
restoring or saving the Vacon website. Update the
malfunction. drive with it.
9 80 Undervoltage (fault) The DC-link voltage is lower If there is a temporary supply

than the limits. voltage break, reset the fault and
restart the drive. Do a check of the
supply voltage. If the supply
• too low a supply voltage is sufficient, there is an
voltage internal fault. Examine the
• defective component electrical network for fault. Ask
• a defective input fuse instructions from the distributor
• the external charge near to you.
switch is not closed
NOTE!
This fault becomes active
only if the drive is in Run
state.
10 91 Input phase Do a check of the supply voltage,

• supply voltage the fuses and supply cable, the
malfunction rectifying bridge and the gate
• a defective fuse or control of the thyristor (MR6->).
malfunction in the
supply cables
The load must be a

minimum of 10-20% for the
supervision to work.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
11 100 Output phase The measurement of Do a check of the motor cable and
supervision current tells that there is no the motor. Do a check of the du/dt
current in 1 motor phase. or sinus filter.
• a motor or motor
cables malfunction
• filter (du/dt, sinus)
malfunction
12 110 Brake chopper There is no brake resistor. Do a check of the brake resistor
supervision The brake resistor is and the cabling. If they are in good
(hardware fault) broken. A defective brake condition, there is a fault in the
chopper. resistor or the chopper. Ask
111 Brake chopper instructions from the distributor
saturation alarm near to you.
13 120 AC drive Too low a temperature in The ambient temperature is too

undertemperature the heatsink of the power low for the drive. Move the drive in
(fault) unit or in the power board. a warmer position.
14 130 AC drive Too high a temperature in Do a check of the actual amount

overtemperature the heatsink of the power and flow of cooling air. Examine
(fault, heatsink) unit or in the power board. the heatsink for dust. Do a check of
The temperature limits of the ambient temperature. Make
131 AC drive the heatsink are different in sure that the switching frequency
overtemperature all the frames. is not too high in relation to the
(alarm, heatsink) ambient temperature and the
motor load. Do a check of the
132 AC drive cooling fan.
overtemperature
(fault, board)
133 AC drive
overtemperature
(alarm, board)
15 140 Motor stall The motor stalled. Do a check of the motor and the
load.
16 150 Motor There is too heavy a load on Decrease the motor load. If there is
overtemperature the motor. no motor overload, do a check of
the motor thermal protection
parameters (parameter group 3.9
Protections).
17 160 Motor underload There is not a sufficient load Do a check of the load. Do a check
on the motor. of the parameters. Do a check of
the du/dt and sinus filters.

Fault
code
19 180 Power overload The power of the drive is too Decrease the load. Examine the
(short-time high. dimensions of drive. Examine if it is
supervision) too small for the load.
181 Power overload

(long-time
supervision)
25 240 Motor control fault This fault is available only if Reset the fault and restart the
you use a customer-specific drive. Increase the identification
241 application. A malfunction in current. See the fault history
the start angle source for more information.
identification.
• The rotor moves during

identification.
• The new angle does not
agree with the old
value.
26 250 Start-up prevented It is not possible to do a Reset the fault and stop the drive.
start-up of the drive. When Load the software and start the
the Run request is ON, a drive.
new software (a firmware or
an application), a parameter
setting or other file that
effects the operation of the
drive, is loaded to drive.
29 280 Atex thermistor The ATEX thermistor tells Reset the fault. Do a check of the
that there is an thermistor and its connections.
overtemperature.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
30 290 Safe Off The safe Off signal A does Reset the fault and restart the
not let you to set the drive to drive. Do a check of the signals
the READY state. from the control board to the
power unit and the D connector.
291 Safe Off The safe Off signal B does
not let you to set the drive to
the READY state.
500 Safety configuration The safety configuration Remove the safety configuration
switch was installed. switch from the control board.
501 Safety configuration There are too many STO Keep 1 of the STO option boards.
option boards. It is possible Remove the others. See the safety
to have only 1. manual.
502 Safety configuration The STO option board was Put the STO option board into the
installed in an incorrect slot. correct slot. See the safety
manual.
503 Safety configuration There is no safety Install the safety configuration

configuration switch on the switch on the control board. See
control board. the safety manual.
504 Safety configuration The safety configuration Install the safety configuration
switch was installed switch into the correct position on
incorrectly on the control the control board. See the safety
board. manual.
505 Safety configuration The safety configuration Do a check of the installation of the
switch was installed safety configuration switch on the
incorrectly on the STO STO option board. See the safety
option board. manual.
506 Safety configuration There is no communication Do a check of the installation of the

with the STO option board. STO option board. See the safety
manual.
507 Safety configuration The STO option board is not Reset the drive and restart it. If the
compatible with the fault occurs again, ask instructions
hardware. from your nearest distributor.

Fault
code
30 520 Safety diagnostics The STO inputs have a Do a check of the external safety
different status. switch. Do a check of the input
connection and cable of the safety
switch. Reset the drive and restart.
If the fault occurs again, ask
instructions from your nearest
distributor.
521 Safety diagnostics A malfunction in the ATEX Reset the drive and restart. If the
thermistor diagnostic. There fault occurs again, change the
is no connection in the ATEX option board.
thermistor input.
522 Safety diagnostics A short-circuit in the Do a check of the ATEX thermistor

connection of the ATEX input connection. Do a check of the
thermistor input. external ATEX connection. Do a
check of the external ATEX
thermistor.
523 Safety diagnostics A problem occured in the Reset the drive and restart. If the
internal safety circuit. fault occurs again, ask instructions
from your nearest distributor.
524 Safety diagnostics An overvoltage in the safety Reset the drive and restart. If the
option board fault occurs again, ask instructions
525 Safety diagnostics An undervoltage in the Reset the drive and restart. If the
safety option board fault occurs again, ask instructions
526 Safety diagnostics An internal malfunction in Reset the drive and restart. If the
the safety option board CPU fault occurs again, ask instructions
or in the memory handling from your nearest distributor.
527 Safety diagnostics An internal malfunction in Reset the drive and restart. If the
the safety function fault occurs again, ask instructions
530 Safe torque off An emergency stop was When the STO function is activated,
connected or some other the drive is in safe state.
STO operation was
activated.
32 311 Fan cooling The fan speed does not Reset the fault and restart the
agree to the speed drive. Clean or replace the fan.
reference accurately, but
the drive operates correctly.
This fault shows only in the
MR7 and in the drives that
bigger than MR7.
312 Fan cooling The fan life time (that is, Replace the fan and reset the life
50,000 h) is complete. time counter of the fan.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
33 320 Fire mode enabled The Fire mode of the drive is Do a check of the parameter
enabled. The protections of settings and the signals. Some of
the drive are not used. This the protections of the drive are
alarm is reset automatically disabled.
when Fire mode is disabled.
37 361 Device changed The power unit was Reset the fault. The drive reboots
(same type) replaced by a new one that after you reset the fault.
has the same size. The
device is ready to be used.
The parameters are
available in the drive.
362 Device changed The option board in slot B Reset the fault. The drive starts to
(same type) was replaced by a new one use the old parameter settings.
that you have used before in
the same slot. The device is
ready to be used.
363 Device changed The same cause as in ID362,

(same type) but refers to Slot C.

(same type) but refers to Slot D.

(same type) but refers to Slot E.
38 372 Device added (same An option board was put into The device is ready for use. The
type) slot B. You have used the drive starts to use the old
option board before in the parameter settings.
same slot. The device is
ready to be used.
373 Device added (same The same cause as in ID372,

type) but refers to Slot C.

type) but refers to Slot D.

type) but refers to Slot E.
39 382 Device removed An option board was The device is not available. Reset
removed from slot A or B. the fault.
383 Device removed The same cause as in ID380,

but refers to Slot C

but refers to Slot D

but refers to Slot E

Fault
code
40 390 Device unknown An unknown device was The device is not available. If the
connected (the power unit/ fault occurs again, ask instructions
option board) from your nearest distributor.
41 400 IGBT temperature The calculated IGBT Do a check of the parameter

temperature is too high. settings. Examine the actual
amount and flow of cooling air. Do
a check of the ambient
• too high a motor load temperature. Examine the heatsink
• too high an ambient for dust. Make sure that the
temperature switching frequency is not too high
• hardware malfunction in relation to the ambient
temperature and the motor load.
Do a check of the cooling fan. Make
an identification run.
44 431 Device changed There is a new power unit of Reset the fault. The drive reboots
(different type) a different type. Parameters after you reset the fault. Set the
are not available in the power unit parameters again.
settings.
433 Device changed The option board in slot C Reset the fault. Set the option
(different type) was replaced by a new one board parameters again.
that you have not used
before in the same slot. No
parameter settings are
saved.

(different type) but refers to Slot D.

45 441 Device added There is a new power unit of Reset the fault. The drive reboots
(different type) a different type. Parameters after you reset the fault. Set the
are not available in the power unit parameters again.
settings.
443 Device added A new option board, that you Set the option board parameters
(different type) have not used before in the again.
same slot, was put in slot C.
No parameter settings are
saved.
444 Device added The same cause as in ID443,

445 Device added The same cause as in ID443,

(different type) but refers to Slot E.
46 662 Real Time Clock The voltage of the RTC Replace the battery.
battery is low.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
47 663 Software updated The software of the drive No steps are necessary.
was updated, the full
software package or an
application.
50 1050 AI low fault 1 or more of the available Replace the defective parts. Do a
analogue input signals is check of the analogue input circuit.
below 50% of the minimum Make sure that parameter AI1
signal range. A control cable Signal Range is set correctly.
is defective or loose. A
malfunction in a signal
source.
51 1051 Device external fault The digital input signal that This is a user-defined fault. Do a
is set with parameter check of the digital inputs and
P3.5.1.11 or P3.5.1.12 was schematics.
activated.
52 1052 Keypad The connection between the Do a check of the control panel
communication fault control panel and the drive connection and the control panel
1352 is defective. cable if you have it.
53 1053 Fieldbus The data connection Do a check of the installation and

communication fault between the fieldbus master fieldbus master.
and the fieldbus board is
defective.
54 1354 Slot A fault A defective option board or Do a check of the board and the
slot slot. Ask instructions from your
1454 Slot B fault nearest distributor.
1554 Slot C fault
1654 Slot D fault
1754 Slot E fault
57 1057 Identification There was a failure in the Make sure that the motor is
identification run. connected to the drive. Make sure
that there is no load on the motor
shaft. Make sure that the start
command is not removed before
the identification run is complete.
58 1058 Mechanical brake The actual status of the Do a check of the status and
mechanical brake is connections of the mechanical
different from the control brake. See parameter P3.5.1.44
signal for longer than the and parameter Group 3.20:
value of P3.20.6. Mechanical brake.
63 1063 Quick Stop fault The Quick stop function is Find the cause for the quick stop
activated activation. After you find it, correct
1363 Quick Stop alarm it. Reset the fault and restart the
drive. See parameter P3.5.1.26 and
the quick stop parameters.

Fault
code
65 1065 PC communication The data connection Do a check of the installation,

fault between the PC and the cable and terminals between the
drive is defective PC and the drive.
66 1366 Thermistor input 1 The motor temperature Do a check of the motor cooling
fault increased. and the load. Do a check of the
thermistor connection. If the
1466 Thermistor input 2 thermistor input is not used, you
fault have to short-circuit it. Ask
instructions from your nearest
1566 Thermistor input 3 distributor.
fault
68 1301 Maintenance counter The value of the Do the necessary maintenance.

1 alarm maintenance counter is Reset the counter. See parameter
higher than the alarm limit. B3.16.4 or P3.5.1.40.
1302 Maintenance counter The value of the

1 fault maintenance counter is
higher than the fault limit.

2 alarm maintenance counter is
higher than the alarm limit.

2 fault maintenance counter is
higher than the fault limit.
69 1310 Fieldbus The ID number that is used Do a check of the parameters in

communication fault to map the values to the Fieldbus Data Mapping menu.
Fieldbus Process Data Out
is not valid.
1311 It is not possible to convert 1 The type of the value is undefined.

or more values for Fieldbus Do a check of the parameters in
Process Data Out. the Fieldbus Data Mapping menu.
1312 There is an overflow when Do a check of the parameters in

the values for Fieldbus the Fieldbus Data Mapping menu.
Process Data Out (16-bit)
are mapped and converted.
76 1076 Start prevented The start command is Reset the drive to start the correct
blocked to prevent the operation. The parameter settings
accidental rotation of the tell if it is necessary to restart the
motor during the first drive.
power-up.
77 1077 >5 connections There are more than 5 Leave 5 active connections.
active fieldbus or PC tool Remove the other connections.
connections. You can use
only 5 connections at the
same time.
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Fault
code
100 1100 Soft fill timeout There is a timeout in the Do a check of the process. Do a
Soft fill function in the PID check of the parameters in the
controller. The process menu M3.13.8.
value was not achieved in
the time limit. A pipe that
broke can be the cause.
101 1101 Feedback supervision The PID controller: the Do a check of the process. Do a
fault (PID1) feedback value is not in the check of the parameter settings,
supervision limits (P3.13.6.2 the supervision limits and the
and P3.13.6.3) and the delay delay.
(P3.13.6.4), if you set the
delay.
105 1105 Feedback supervision The external PID controller:

fault (ExtPID) the feedback value is not in
the supervision limits
(P3.14.4.2 and P3.14.4.3)
and the delay (P3.14.4.4), if
you set the delay.
109 1109 Input pressure The supervision signal of the Do a check of the process. Do a
supervision input pressure (P3.13.9.2) is check of the parameters in menu
lower than the alarm limit M3.13.9. Do a check of the input
(P3.13.9.7). pressure sensor and connections.
1409 The supervision signal of the

input pressure (P3.13.9.2) is
lower than the fault limit
(P3.13.9.8) .
111 1315 Temperature fault 1 1 or more of the Find the cause of the temperature
temperature input signals rise. Do a check of the temperature
(set in P3.9.6.1) is higher sensor and connections. If no
than the alarm limit sensor is connected, make sure
(P3.9.6.2). that the temperature input is
hardwired. See the option board
1316 1 or more of the manual for more data.
temperature input signals
(set in P3.9.6.1) is higher
than the fault limit
(P3.9.6.3).
112 1317 Temperature fault 2 1 or more of the

(P3.9.6.6).
1318 1 or more of the

(P3.9.6.7).

Fault
code
300 700 Unsupported The application is not Replace the application.

compatible (it is
unsupported).
701 The option board or the slot Remove the option board.
is not compatible (it is
unsupported).
10 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

APPENDIX 1 VACON · 337
11 APPENDIX 1
11.1 THE DEFAULT VALUES OF PARAMETERS IN THE DIFFERENT
APPLICATIONS
The explanation of symbols in the table
• A = Standard application
• B = Local/ Remote application
• C = Multi-step speed application
• D = PID control application
• E = Multi-purpose application
• F = Motor potentiometer application

VACON · 338 APPENDIX 1
Table 122: The default values of parameters in the different applications
Index Parameter Default Unit ID Description
A B C D E F
3.2.1 Rem Control 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 0 = I/O Control

Place
3.2.2 Local/Remote 0 0 0 0 0 0 211 0 = Remote
3.2.6 I/O A Logic 2 2 2 2 2 2 300 2 = Forw-Back (edge)
3.2.7 I/O B Logic 2 2 2 2 2 2 363 2 = Forw-Back (edge)
3.3.1.5 I/O A Ref Sel 6 5 6 7 6 8 117

5 = AI2
6 = AI1 + AI2
7 = PID
8 = Motor Potentiometer
3.3.1.6 I/O B Ref Sel 4 4 4 4 4 4 131 4 = AI1
3.3.1.7 Keypad Ref Sel 2 2 2 2 2 2 121 2 = Keypad Reference
3.3.1.10 Fieldbus Ref 3 3 3 3 3 3 122 3 = Fieldbus Reference

Sel
3.3.2.1 Torque Ref Sel 0 0 0 0 4 0 641

0 = Not Used
4 = AI2
3.3.3.1 Preset Freq - - 0 0 0 0 182 0 = Binary Coded

Mode
3.3.3.3 Preset Freq 1 - - 10.0 10.0 5.0 10.0 105
3.3.3.4 Preset Freq 2 - - 15.0 - - - Hz 106
3.3.3.5 Preset Freq 3 - - 20.0 - - - Hz 126
3.3.3.6 Preset Freq 4 - - 25.0 - - - Hz 127
3.3.3.7 Preset Freq 5 - - 30.0 - - - Hz 128
3.3.3.8 Preset Freq 6 - - 40.0 - - - Hz 129
3.3.3.9 Preset Freq 7 - - 50.0 - - - Hz 130
3.5.1.1 Ctrl Signal 1 A 100 100 100 100 100 100 403 100 = DigIN SlotA.1
11 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

A B C D E F
3.5.1.2 Ctrl Signal 2 A 101 101 101 0 101 101 404

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
101 = DigIN SlotA.2
3.5.1.4 Ctrl Signal 1 B 0 103 0 103 0 0 423

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
103 = DigIN SlotA.4
3.5.1.5 Ctrl Signal 2 B - 104 - - - - 424 104 = DigIN SlotA.5
3.5.1.7 I/O B Ctrl Force 0 105 0 105 0 0 425

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.1.8 I/O B Ref Force 0 105 0 105 0 0 343

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.1.9 Fieldbus Ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 411 0 = DigIN Slot0.1

Force
3.5.1.10 Keypad Ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 410 0 = DigIN Slot0.1

Force
3.5.1.11 External Fault 102 102 102 101 104 102 405
Close 101 = DigIN SlotA.2
102 = DigIN SlotA.3
104 = DigIN SlotA.5
3.5.1.13 Fault Reset 105 0 0 102 102 0 414

Close 0 = DigIN Slot0.1
102 = DigIN SlotA.3
105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.1.19 Ramp 2 0 0 0 0 105 0 408

Selection 0 = DigIN Slot0.1
105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.1.21 Preset Freq 103 0 103 104 103 103 419

Sel0 0 = DigIN Slot0.1
103 = DigIN SlotA.4
104 = DigIN SlotA.5
3.5.1.22 Preset Freq 104 0 104 0 0 0 420

104 = DigIN SlotA.5

VACON · 340 APPENDIX 1
A B C D E F
3.5.1.23 Preset Freq 0 0 105 0 0 0 421

105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.1.24 MotPot UP 0 0 0 0 0 104 418

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
104 = DigIN SlotA.5
3.5.1.25 MotPot DOWN 0 0 0 0 0 105 417

0 = DigIN Slot0.1
105 = DigIN SlotA.6
3.5.2.1.1 AI1 Signal 100 100 100 100 100 100 377 100 = AnIN SlotA.1
Selection
3.5.2.1.2 AI1 Filter Time 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 s 378
3.5.2.1.3 AI1 Signal 0 0 0 0 0 0 379 0 = 0..10V / 0..20mA

Range
3.5.2.1.4 AI1 Custom Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 % 380
3.5.2.1.5 AI1 Custom 100. 100 100. 100. 100. 100. % 381
Max 0 .0 0 0 0 0
3.5.2.1.6 AI1 Signal 0 0 0 0 0 0 387 0 = Normal

Inversion
3.5.2.2.1 AI2 Signal 101 101 101 101 101 101 388 101 = AnIN SlotA.2
Selection
3.5.2.2.2 AI2 Filter Time 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 s 389
3.5.2.2.3 AI2 Signal 1 1 1 1 1 1 390 1 = 2..10V / 4..20mA

Range
3.5.2.2.4 AI2 Custom Min 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 % 391
3.5.2.2.5 AI2 Custom 100. 100 100. 100. 100. 100. % 392
Max 0 .0 0 0 0 0
3.5.2.2.6 AI2 Signal 0 0 0 0 0 0 398 0 = Normal

Inversion
3.5.3.2.1 RO1 Function 2 2 2 2 2 2 11001 2 = Run
3.5.3.2.4 RO2 Function 3 3 3 3 3 3 11004 3 = Fault
3.5.3.2.7 RO3 Function 1 1 1 1 1 1 11007 1 = Ready
11 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

A B C D E F
3.5.4.1.1 AO1 Function 2 2 2 2 2 2 10050 2 = Output Freq
3.5.4.1.2 AO1 Filter Time 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 s 10051
3.5.4.1.3 AO1 Min Signal 0 0 0 0 0 0 10052
3.5.4.1.4 AO1 Min Scale 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 10053
3.5.1.1.5 AO1 Max Scale 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 10054
3.13.2.6 SP1 Source - - - 3 - - 332 3 = AI1
3.13.3.1 Function - - - 1 - - 333 1 = Source 1
3.13.3.3 FB 1 Source - - - 2 - - 334 2 = AI2

Find your nearest Vacon office
on the Internet at:
www.vacon.com
Manual authoring:
[email protected]
Document ID:
Vacon Plc.
Runsorintie 7
65380 Vaasa
Finland
Subject to change without prior notice

© 2014 Vacon Plc. Rev. F

Vacon 100 Application Manual DPD00927F UK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vacon 100 Application Manual DPD00927F UK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vacon 100 Application Manual DPD00927F UK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

vacon 100

Software version: FW0072V012

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

• How to start the work with the control panel.

• Making a selection of the application configuration.

• The display types and how to use the control panel.

• Data on the monitoring values.

• A list of all the parameters of the drive.

• How to use the parameters.

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected]

Chapter 10, Fault tracing

• The faults and their causes.

• Data on the different default values of the applications.

Index Parameter Min Max Unit Default ID Description

TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

FUNCTIONS OF THE VACON® AC DRIVE

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected]

TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected]

TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

7.4 Power unit settings 211

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected]

9.13 Multipump function 299

TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

1 QUICK STARTUP GUIDE

Fig. 1: The buttons of the keypad

1.2 THE DISPLAYS

The display shows this data.

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected] 1

STOP READY I/O

1.3 FIRST START-UP

1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Language selection (P6.1) The selection is different in all the language

Daylight saving* (P5.5.5)

3 Time* (P5.5.2) hh:mm:ss

4 Year* (P5.5.4) yyyy

5 Date* (P5.5.3) dd.mm.

* If a battery is installed, you see these questions.

Run Startup wizard?

Make a selection of an application (P1.2 Application,

Set a value for P3.1.2.2 Motor Type (so that it agrees

Set a value for P3.1.1.2 Motor Nominal Frequency Range: 8.00...320.00 Hz

12 Set a value for P3.1.1.4 Motor Nominal Current Range: Varies

13 Set a value for P3.1.1.5 Motor Cos Phi Range: 0.30-1.00

24-HOUR SUPPORT +358 (0)201 212 575 · EMAIL: [email protected] 1

Set a value for P3.3.1.1 Minimum Frequency Range: 0.00...P3.3.1.2 Hz

Set a value for P3.3.1.2 Maximum Frequency Range: P3.3.1.1...320.00 Hz

16 Set a value for P3.4.1.2 Acceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s

17 Set a value for P3.4.1.3 Deceleration Time 1 Range: 0.1...300.0 s

Run the Application wizard?

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE APPLICATIONS

1.4.1 STANDARD APPLICATION

1 TEL. +358 (0)201 2121 · FAX +358 (0)201 212 205

Standard I/O board

4 AI2+ Analogue input 2 + Frequency reference

6 24Vout 24V auxiliary voltage

12 24Vout 24V auxiliary voltage

16 DI6 Digital input 6 Fault reset

18 AO1+ Analogue output 1 + Output frequency